Owners Manual
2006 CR-V Online Reference Owner's Manual
Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety................................................................................................................. ii
Important Handling Information..................................................................................................... iii
Your Vehicle at a Glance..................................................................................................................... 3
Driver and Passenger Safety .............................................................................................................. 5
Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.
Instruments and Controls................................................................................................................. 53
Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.
Comfort and Convenience Features .............................................................................................. 97
How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.
Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 141
What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.
Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 155
The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.
Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 183
The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.
Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 219
This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.
Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 243
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 255
A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us.
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 259
How to order manuals and other technical literature.
Index...................................................................................................................................................... I
Service Information Summary
A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Accord Value Package Audio System
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:49:40 31S9A640 0002 Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2006 Honda CR-V was a wise
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
you can refer to it at any time.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a
symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual
helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.
When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staff
is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle.
Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer
any questions and concerns.
WARNING: This product contains
or emits chemicals known to the
state of California to cause cancer
and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with one or
more recording devices commonly
referred to as event data recorders
or sensing and diagnostic modules.
i
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:49:54 31S9A640 0003 A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol
and one of
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.
ii
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:50:00 31S9A640 0004 Important Handling Information
Your CR-V has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground
clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a high
center of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear
seat belts.
For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page 156 of this manual and the
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines section on page 179 . Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss of
control or an accident.
iii
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:50:42 31S9A640 0008 Your Vehicle at a Glance
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.89)
DRIVER’S FRONT
AIRBAG (P.9 , 23)
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS (P.55)
GAUGES (P.61)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (P.161)
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (P.159)
Your Vehicle at a Glance
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.73)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.103)
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
(P.30)
FRONT PASSENGER
AIRBAG
(P.9 , 23)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.86)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P.67)
PARKING BRAKE
(P.68)
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
(P.98)
HATCH GLASS RELEASE
BUTTON
(P.74)
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
(P.95)
A/T model is shown.
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HANDLE
(P.143)
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
(P.144)
3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:50:50 31S9A640 0009 Your Vehicle at a Glance
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS
(P.66)
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
(P.67)
SHIFT LEVER (A/T)
(P.161)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.103)
CLOCK
(P.137)
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS*2
(P.135)
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.30)
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM
ON/OFF SWITCH
(P.171)
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
(P.65)
MOONROOF SWITCH*2
(P.88)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P.67)
CRUISE CONTROL
MASTER BUTTON
(P.138)
A/T model is shown.
*1 :
*2 :
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
(P.68)
HORN*1
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT
(P.69)
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS (P.138)
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
If equipped.
4
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
PARKING BRAKE
(P.68)
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:50:56 31S9A640 0010 Driver and Passenger Safety
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 7
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 11
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 11
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 12
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 13
5. Fasten and Position the
Seat Belts .............................. 14
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position ................................. 15
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16
Additional Safety Precautions .... 17
Additional Information About
Your Seat Belts ........................ 18
Seat Belt System Components ... 18
Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 18
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 19
Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 20
Additional Information About
Your Airbags ............................ 21
Airbag System Components ....... 21
How Your Front Airbags
Work.......................................... 23
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 26
How Your Side Curtain
Airbags Work ........................... 28
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 29
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 29
How the Passenger Airbag
Off Indicator Works ................ 30
Airbag Service .............................. 30
Additional Safety Precautions .... 31
Protecting Children − General
Guidelines ................................. 32
All Children Must Be
Restrained ................................ 32
All Children Should Sit in a
Back Seat .................................. 33
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 33
If You Must Drive with Several
Children .................................... 35
If a Child Requires Close
Attention ................................... 35
Additional Safety Precautions .... 35
Protecting Infants and Small
Children .................................... 37
Protecting Infants ........................ 37
Protecting Small Children .......... 38
Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 39
Installing a Child Seat ..................... 40
With LATCH ................................ 41
With a Lap/Shoulder Belt .......... 43
With a Tether ............................... 45
Protecting Larger Children ............ 46
Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 47
Using a Booster Seat ................... 47
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front .......................................... 48
Additional Safety Precautions .... 49
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 50
Safety Labels .................................... 51
5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:51:10 31S9A640 0011 Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
The recommendations on this page
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page 14 ).
Restrain All Children
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
small children should be restrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages 32 − 49 ).
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Don’t Drink and Drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
6
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
Control Your Speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page 187 ).
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:51:19 31S9A640 0012 Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
(10)
(3)
(4)
(9)
(9)
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
(5)
(11)
(2)
(8) (6)
(2)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Door Locks
(11) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
a proper position and always wear
your seat belts. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
The following pages explain how you
can take an active role in protecting
yourself and your passengers.
7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driver and Passenger Safety
(1)
(7)
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:51:35 31S9A640 0013 Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
Your seat belt system also includes
an indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Why Wear Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most
effective safety device for adults and
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
rollovers.
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
What You Should Do:
Always wear your seat belt, and
make sure you wear it properly.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:51:44 31S9A640 0014 Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
23 for more information on how
your front airbags work).
Your vehicle has side airbags to help
protect the upper torso of the driver
or a front seat passenger during a
moderate to severe side impact (see
page 26 for more information on how
your side airbags work).
Your vehicle also has side curtain
airbags to help protect the heads of
the driver, front passenger, and
passengers in the outer rear seating
positions during a moderate to
severe side impact (see page 28 for
more information on how your side
curtain airbags work).
CONTINUED
9
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:51:52 31S9A640 0015 Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, or minor frontal or side
collisions.
What you should do: Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.
Airbags can pose hazards. To do
their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So while
airbags help save lives, they can
cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:52:04 31S9A640 0016 Protecting Adults and Teens
See pages 32 − 49 for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
1.Close and Lock the Doors
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors are closed
and locked.
2.Adjust the Front Seats
Driver and Passenger Safety
Introduction
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult passengers,
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive
or ride in the front.
Locking the doors reduces the
chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
Locking the doors also helps prevent
an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.
See page 73 for how to lock the
doors.
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
CONTINUED
11
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:52:16 31S9A640 0017 Protecting Adults and Teens
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel up and down (see
page 69 ).
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.
3.Adjust the Seat-Backs
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure
the seat is locked in position.
See page 78 for how to adjust the
front seats.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seatbacks should also adjust their seatback to a comfortable, upright
position.
12
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:52:26 31S9A640 0018 Protecting Adults and Teens
4.Adjust the Head Restraints
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
See page 78 for how to adjust the
seat-backs.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the back of your head rests against
the center of the restraint.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page 80 for how to adjust the
head restraints.
Have passengers with adjustable
head restraints adjust their restraints
properly as well. Taller persons
should adjust their restraint as high
as possible.
13
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driver and Passenger Safety
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:52:36 31S9A640 0019 Protecting Adults and Teens
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
5.Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
The seat belt in the center position
of the back seat can be unlatched
and retracted to allow the back seat
to be folded up or down. See page
85 for how to unlatch and relatch
the seat belt.
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:52:46 31S9A640 0020 Protecting Adults and Teens
RELEASE BUTTONS
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause
If a seat belt does not seem to work
properly, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat
The front seats have adjustable seat
belt anchors. To adjust the height of
an anchor, press and hold the release
buttons, and slide the anchor up or
down as needed (it has four
positions).
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
See page 18 for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
CONTINUED
15
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driver and Passenger Safety
very serious injuries in a crash.
6.Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and put on seat belts, it is
very important that they continue to
sit upright, well back in their seats,
with their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:52:55 31S9A640 0021 Protecting Adults and Teens
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
Advice for Pregnant Women
This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.
If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
16
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:53:04 31S9A640 0022 Protecting Adults and Teens
Additional Safety Precautions
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Passengers should not stand up or
change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash
or emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or out of
the vehicle.
Two people should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers. If your
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts. Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
the belt and increase the chance of
serious injury in a crash.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers. Objects on
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
Do not attach solid objects on or
near a door. If a side airbag or a
side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other solid object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
17
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driver and Passenger Safety
Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a foldeddown back seat. If they do, they
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:53:16 31S9A640 0023 Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all five seating
positions. The front seat belts are
also equipped with automatic seat
belt tensioners.
The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you to fasten your seat belt.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belt, the beeper will sound,
and the indicator will flash.
If you do not fasten your seat belt
before the beeper stops, the
indicator will stop flashing but
remain on.
Lap/Shoulder Belt
The lap/shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page 14 for how to
properly position the belt).
To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESS button on the buckle. Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have an additional
locking mechanism that must be
activated to secure a child seat (see
page 43 ).
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the locking
mechanism will activate. The belt
will retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the locking
mechanism, unlatch the buckle and
let the seat belt fully retract. To
refasten the seat belt, pull it out only
as far as needed.
If you continue driving without
fastening your seat belt, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.
18
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:53:27 31S9A640 0024 Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
DETACHABLE ANCHOR
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
If a side curtain airbag deploys
during a side impact, the tensioner
on that side of the vehicle will also
deploy.
The lap/shoulder belt in the center
seating position on the rear seat is
equipped with a detachable anchor
that has two parts: a small latch plate
and an anchor buckle.
The detachable anchor should
normally be latched whenever the
seat-backs are in an upright position.
For more information about the
detachable anchors (see page 85 ).
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in place.
The tensioners can also be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags do not deploy. In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
additional restraint could be helpful.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled in the normal
manner.
19
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driver and Passenger Safety
The tensioners are designed to
activate in any collision severe
enough to cause the front airbags to
deploy, or if a sensor detects your
vehicle is about to rollover (see page
28 ).
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:53:36 31S9A640 0025 Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt Maintenance
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully, and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. If a belt does
not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
208 ). Any belt that is not in good
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by your dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.
Honda provides a lifetime warranty
on seat belts for U.S. models. See
your Honda Warranty Information
booklet for details.
20
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly,
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:53:46 31S9A640 0026 Additional Information About Your Airbags
Your airbag system includes:
Airbag System Components
(1)
(8)
(9)
(8)
(2)
(11)
(12)
(5)
(3)
(14)
(1) Driver’s Airbag
(2) Front Passenger’s Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(4)
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(10)
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(6)
(10) Side Impact Sensors
(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensor Unit
(13) SRS Indicator
(14) Roll Rate Sensor
(15) Side Impact Sensors
(16) Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners
(4)
(15)
(16)
(10) (7)
(5)
(7)
(15)
Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page 23 ).
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page 26 ).
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling,
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
28 ).
CONTINUED
21
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driver and Passenger Safety
(13)
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:53:58 31S9A640 0027 Additional Information About Your Airbags
Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page 19 ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact or
side impact.
Sensors that can detect whether a
child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and automatically turn
the airbag off (see page 27 ).
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page
25 ).
Weight sensors that monitor the
weight on the front passenger’s
seat. These automatically turn off
the passenger’s front airbag if
they detect an infant or small child
may be in the seat (see page 25 ).
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page 29 ).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
sensors, or seat belt tensioners
(see page 29 ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
A rollover sensor that monitors
the degree and rate your vehicle
may roll over and automatically
deploy the side curtain airbags and
activate the front seat belt
tensioners if needed (see page 19 ).
22
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page 30 ).
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:54:11 31S9A640 0028 Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Front Airbags Work
Driver and Passenger Safety
During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
Although both airbags normally
inflate within split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will instantly
inflate the driver’s and front
passenger’s airbags, at the time and
with the force needed.
Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page 25 ).
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
CONTINUED
23
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:54:21 31S9A640 0029 Additional Information About Your Airbags
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
may experience some temporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
Dual-Stage Airbags
Dual-Threshold Airbags
Your front airbags are dual-stage
airbags. This means they have two
inflation stages that can be ignited
sequentially or simultaneously,
depending on crash severity.
Your front airbags are also dualthreshold airbags. Airbags with this
feature have two deployment
thresholds that depend on whether
or not the occupant is wearing a seat
belt.
In a more severe crash, both stages
will ignite simultaneously to provide
the quickest and greatest protection.
In a less severe crash, one stage will
ignite first, then the second stage
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time
with a little less force.
24
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If the occupant’s belt is not latched,
the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
occupant would need extra
protection.
If the occupant’s belt is latched, the
airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:54:33 31S9A640 0030 Additional Information About Your Airbags
Advanced Airbags
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
DRIVER’S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any cargo or metal objects
under the front seats.
Back-seat passengers should not
put their feet under the front seats.
Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.
The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS Indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
PASSENGER’S
SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR
The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. Although Honda
does not encourage carrying an
infant or small child in the front, if
the sensors detect the weight of an
infant or small child, the system will
automatically turn the passenger’s
front airbag off.
CONTINUED
25
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbagcaused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:54:42 31S9A640 0031 Additional Information About Your Airbags
When the airbag is turned off, an
indicator in the center of the
dashboard will come on indicating
passenger airbag ‘‘OFF’’ (see page
30 ).
If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the
airbag will be off. However, the
passenger airbag off indicator will
not come on.
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly, do not do anything
Moving the front seat forcibly
back against cargo on the seat or
floor behind it.
How Your Side Airbags Work
Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
Also, make sure the floor mat behind
the front passenger’s seat is hooked
to the floor mat anchor (see page
208 ). If it is not, the mat may
interfere with the proper operation
of the sensors and operation of the
seat.
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.
This includes:
A rear passenger pushing or
pulling on the back of the
passenger’s seat.
26
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid deceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:54:55 31S9A640 0032 Additional Information About Your Airbags
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
Side Airbag Cutoff System
To reduce the risk of injury from an
inflating side airbag, your vehicle has
an automatic cutoff system for the
passenger’s side airbag.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in front, this system
is designed to shut off the side
airbag if a child leans into the side
airbag’s path.
The side airbag may also shut off if a
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.
If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page 29 ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
path and when the indicator comes
on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
27
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driver and Passenger Safety
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:55:03 31S9A640 0033 Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work
If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
In a Rollover
A rollover sensor monitors the
degree and rate your vehicle may roll
over and automatically deploy the
side curtain airbags and activate the
front seat belt tensioners (see page
19 ).
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
In a Side Impact
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid acceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
In a rollover toward the front
passenger’s side of the vehicle, both
side curtain airbags will inflate and
the front seat belt tensioners will
activate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
28
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:55:16 31S9A640 0034 Additional Information About Your Airbags
If you see any of these indications,
the airbags and seat belt tensioners
may not work properly when you
need them.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on briefly then goes off. This
tells you the system is working
properly.
Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works
U.S.
Canada
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect the weight of an infant or
small child on the front passenger’s
seat. It does not mean there is a
problem with your side airbags.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on briefly and go off
(see page 57 ). If it doesn’t come on,
stays on, or comes on while driving
without a passenger in the front seat,
have the system checked.
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or
flashes on and off while you drive.
29
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driver and Passenger Safety
How the SRS Indicator Works
The SRS indicator alerts
you to a potential problem
with your airbags or seat belt
tensioners.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:55:29 31S9A640 0035 Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
If no one is riding in the front seat,
the airbag will be automatically shut
off. However, the indicator will not
come on.
If the indicator comes on with no
passenger in the front, or with an
adult in the seat, there may be a
problem with the advanced airbag
system. Have the vehicle checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
U.S.
Canada
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect an infant or small child may
be in the front passenger’s seat. It
does not mean there is a problem
with the airbag.
The passenger airbag off indicator
may also come on and off repeatedly
if total weight on the seat is near the
airbag cutoff threshold.
If this happens, have the passenger
ride properly restrained in a back
seat. If the passenger must ride in
front, move the seat as far to the
rear as possible, have the passenger
sit upright and wear the seat belt
properly.
30
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Airbag Service
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. Any
seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.
Do not try to remove or replace
any airbag by yourself. This must
be done by your dealer or a
knowledgeable body shop.
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:55:38 31S9A640 0036 Additional Information About Your Airbags
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact. Even if your
Do not attempt to deactivate your
airbags. Together, airbags and
Do not expose the front seat-backs
to liquid. If water or another liquid
seat belts provide the best
protection.
soaks into a seat-back, it can
prevent the side airbag cutoff
system from working properly.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason. Tampering could cause
Do not cover or replace front seatback covers without consulting
your dealer. Improperly replacing
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
Do not remove or modify a front
seat without consulting your
dealer. This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009.
31
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driver and Passenger Safety
airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor, the front
passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all
seat belts worn during the crash to
make sure they are operating
properly.
Additional Safety Precautions
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:55:47 31S9A640 0037 Protecting Children − General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of the death of children aged 12 and
under.
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to properly protect child
passengers.
If you have children, or ever need to
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be properly
restrained when they ride in a
vehicle.
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle (see pages 37 − 46 ).
32
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly (see pages 46 − 49 ).
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:56:00 31S9A640 0038 Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Children who ride in back are less
likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that
automatically turns the passenger’s
front airbag off (see page 30 ),
please follow these guidelines:
Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag. If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
Small Children
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag. Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt (see page 46 for important
information about protecting larger
children).
CONTINUED
33
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driver and Passenger Safety
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat. The National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration and
Transport Canada recommend that
all children aged 12 and under be
properly restrained in a back seat.
Some states have laws restricting
where children may ride.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
U.S. Models
DASHBOARD
SUN VISOR
Canadian Models
SUN VISOR
34
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
▼
05/06/30 09:56:15 31S9A640 0039 Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:56:28 31S9A640 0040 Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page 46 ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page 78 ).
Have the child sit upright and well
back in the seat (see page 15 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
14 ).
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual contact,
we strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in a back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
Additional Safety Precautions
Never hold an infant or child on
your lap. If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
or a child. During a crash, the belt
could press deep into the child and
cause serious or fatal injuries.
Never let two children use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
CONTINUED
35
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driver and Passenger Safety
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Your vehicle has a back seat where
children can be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry a group of
children, and a child must ride in
front:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Use the childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
rear doors. This can prevent
Lock all doors, the tailgate and the
hatch when your vehicle is not in
use. Children who play in vehicles
children from accidentally falling
out (see page 73 ).
can accidentally get trapped inside.
Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles.
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle. Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous.
For example, infants and small
children left in a vehicle on a hot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
Keep vehicle keys/remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children. Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the tailgate or
hatch glass, which can lead to
accidental injury or death.
36
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
▼
05/06/30 09:56:36 31S9A640 0041 Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:56:47 31S9A640 0042 Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position. If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the back
seat, but not in the front. Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front
seat.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed in the back
seat, a rear-facing child seat may
prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat as
far back as recommended, or from
locking their seat-back in the desired
position. It could also interfere with
proper operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
Child Seat Type
An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat and the child is at least
one year old.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
CONTINUED
37
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driver and Passenger Safety
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rearfacing, reclining mode.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:56:57 31S9A640 0043 Protecting Infants and Small Children
In any of these situations, we
strongly recommend that you install
the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Placement
We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too
Child Seat Type
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat until the child
reaches the weight or height limit
for the seat.
A child who is at least one year old,
and who fits within the child seat
maker’s weight and height limits,
should be restrained in a forwardfacing, upright child seat.
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a fivepoint harness system as shown.
38
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:57:11 31S9A640 0044 Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
If it is necessary to put a forwardfacing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, and be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
Selecting a Child Seat
When buying a child seat, you need
to choose either a conventional child
seat, or one designed for use with
the lower anchors and tethers for
children (LATCH) system.
Conventional child seats must be
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into the two outer
seating positions in the back seat.
In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCHcompatible child seat can be installed
using a seat belt.
Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
1.The child seat should meet U.S. or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213. Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forwardfacing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
Since LATCH-compatible child seats
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation,
we recommend selecting this style.
2.The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
Rear-facing for infants, forwardfacing for small children.
We also recommend selecting a
LATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,
rather than a flexible, anchor (see
page 41 ).
CONTINUED
39
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driver and Passenger Safety
Even with advanced front airbags
that automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page 30 ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:57:21 31S9A640 0045 Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
3.The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where the seat will be
used.
Installing a Child Seat
After selecting a proper child seat
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
1.Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle. All child seats must be
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (lower anchors and
tethers for children) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
2.Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
40
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
3.Secure the child in the child seat.
Make sure the child is properly
strapped in the child seat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rearfacing child seats.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:57:33 31S9A640 0046 Installing a Child Seat
BUTTON
The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
LOWER ANCHORS
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
1. Move the seat belt buckle or
tongue away from the lower
anchors.
2. Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
Rigid type
3. Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
shown above.
CONTINUED
41
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driver and Passenger Safety
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers
for children) at the outer rear seats.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:57:47 31S9A640 0047 Installing a Child Seat
ANCHOR
TETHER STRAP HOOK
Flexible type
Other LATCH-compatible seats
have a flexible-type connector as
shown above.
4. Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
5. Remove the head restraint (see
page 80 ). Make sure the removed
head restraint is secured in the
cargo area. Reinstall the head
restraint when the child seat is
removed.
6. Route the tether strap over the
seat-back, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
7. Locate the appropriate anchor
cover, and pull it down and out to
expose the tether anchor.
42
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8. Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchor in the ceiling, then
tighten the strap as instructed by
the child seat maker.
9. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:57:57 31S9A640 0048 Installing a Child Seat
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a locking mechanism
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
If you intend to install a child seat in
the center seating position of the
rear seat, make sure the detachable
seat belt anchor is securely latched.
1. With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
2. To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
CONTINUED
43
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driver and Passenger Safety
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:58:05 31S9A640 0049 Installing a Child Seat
To deactivate the locking
mechanism and remove a child seat,
unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
belt, and let the belt fully retract.
4. After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
5. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
44
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:58:18 31S9A640 0050 Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether
Using an Outer Anchor
ANCHOR
COVER
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the back seat, using one of the
anchorage points shown above.
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
Driver and Passenger Safety
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS
TETHER STRAP HOOK
1. After properly securing the child
seat (see page 43 ), remove the
head restraint, then route the
tether strap over the seat-back.
Make sure to store the removed
head restraint in the cargo area
and to reinstall it when the child
seat is removed.
2. Remove the cover with a small
flat-tipped screwdriver or
fingernail file.
3. Attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
4. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
CONTINUED
45
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:58:27 31S9A640 0051 Installing a Child Seat, Protecting Larger Children
Using the Center Anchor
ANCHOR
TETHER STRAP HOOK
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder
belt.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.
1. After properly securing the child
seat (see page 43 ), remove the
head restraint, then route the
tether strap over the seat-back.
Make sure to store the removed
head restraint in the cargo area
and to reinstall it when the child
seat is removed.
2. Follow steps 2 through 4 in the
previous page.
46
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.
If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:58:39 31S9A640 0052 Protecting Larger Children
Checking Seat Belt Fit
3. Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?
Using a Booster Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
5. Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat.
A child who has outgrown a forwardfacing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
1. Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
CONTINUED
47
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:58:53 31S9A640 0053 Protecting Larger Children
Some states and Canadian provinces
also require children to use a booster
seat until they reach a given age or
weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be
sure to check current laws in the
states or provinces where you intend
to drive.
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
federal safety standards (see page
33 ) and that you follow the booster
seat maker’s instructions.
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.
48
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
A side airbag also poses risks. If any
part of a larger child’s body is in the
path of a deploying side airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
Physical Size
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages 14 and 47 ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat, the child should not sit
in front.
Maturity
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:59:04 31S9A640 0054 Protecting Larger Children
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Move the vehicle seat to the rearmost position.
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck. This could result
in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm. This could
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly and securely positioned.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
Supervise the child. Even a mature
children sometimes needs to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt. Devices intended to
improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
49
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driver and Passenger Safety
Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Additional Safety Precautions
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:59:14 31S9A640 0055 Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. You should
have no problem with carbon
monoxide entering the vehicle in
normal driving if you maintain your
vehicle properly.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in an accident
that may have damaged the
underside.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
50
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
With the tailgate/hatch glass open,
airflow can pull exhaust gas into your
vehicle’s interior and create a
hazardous condition. If you must
drive with the tailgate/hatch glass
open, open all the windows and set
the heating and cooling system as
shown below.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the heating
and cooling system as follows:
1. Select the fresh air mode.
mode.
2. Select the
3. Turn the fan on high speed.
4. Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:59:34 31S9A640 0056 Safety Labels
SUN VISOR
U.S. models
Canadian models
Driver and Passenger Safety
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
DASHBOARD
U.S. models only
SUN VISOR
U.S. models only
CONTINUED
51
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:59:53 31S9A640 0057 Safety Labels
HOOD
DOORJAMBS
U.S. models
U.S. models
Canadian models
Canadian models
RADIATOR CAP
52
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 09:59:58 31S9A640 0058 Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
Tailgate and Hatch Glass................ 74
Remote Transmitter ........................ 75
Seats .................................................. 78
Seat Heaters ..................................... 86
Power Windows ............................... 86
Moonroof .......................................... 88
Mirrors .............................................. 88
Interior Convenience Items ............ 90
Beverage Holders ........................ 91
Built-in Table ................................ 91
Glove Box ..................................... 93
Coin Tray ...................................... 93
Sunglasses Holder ....................... 94
Center Table................................. 94
Accessory Power Sockets........... 95
Center Pocket .............................. 95
Sun Visor....................................... 95
Interior Lights .................................. 95
53
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and Controls
Control Locations ............................ 54
Instrument Panel ............................. 55
Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 56
Gauges .............................................. 61
Trip Meter .................................... 61
Odometer ...................................... 62
Fuel Gauge ................................... 62
Temperature Gauge .................... 62
Outside Temperature
Indicator ................................... 62
Check Fuel Cap Indicator ........... 63
Controls Near the Steering
Wheel ............................................ 64
Windshield Wipers and Washers .. 65
Turn Signals and Headlights .......... 66
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 67
Hazard Warning Button .................. 67
Rear Window Defogger .................. 68
Parking Brake .................................. 68
Steering Wheel Adjustment ........... 69
Keys and Locks ................................ 70
Immobilizer System......................... 71
Ignition Switch ................................. 72
Door Locks ....................................... 73
Power Door Locks ....................... 73
Childproof Door Locks ............... 73
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:00:07 31S9A640 0059 Control Locations
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.73)
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS (P.55)
GAUGES (P.61)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.89)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.86)
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.144)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P.67)
HATCH GLASS
RELEASE BUTTON
(P.74)
A/T model is shown.
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(P.161)
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
(P.159)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.103)
CLOCK
(P.137)
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.30)
SEAT HEATER
SWITCH
(P.86)
PARKING BRAKE
(P.68)
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HANDLE
(P.143)
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
(P.95)
54
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
HEATING/COOLING CONTROLS
(P.98)
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:00:15 31S9A640 0060 Instrument Panel
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.57)
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.57)
IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.57)
VSA ACTIVATION
INDICATOR
(P.58)
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR (P.58)
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR
LAMP
(P.234)
LOW FUEL
INDICATOR
(P.59)
CHARGING
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.56, 233)
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.58)
*
MAINTENANCE
REQUIRED
INDICATOR
(P.60)
SEAT BELT
REMINDER
INDICATOR
(P.56)
HIGH BEAM
INDICATOR
(P.59)
DOOR-OPEN
INDICATOR
(P.59)
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE
SYSTEM INDICATOR*
(P.56, 235)
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
55
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and Controls
TAILGATE AND HATCH GLASS OPEN INDICATOR
(P.59)
SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR*
(P.57)
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
(P.56, 233)
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:00:29 31S9A640 0061 Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many
indicators that give you important
information about your vehicle.
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
See page 234 .
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays on
when the engine is running. For
more information, see page 233 .
Charging System
Indicator
If this indicator comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For more information,
see page 233 .
U.S.
Canada
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator
This indicator has two functions:
1. It comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. Driving with
the parking brake not fully
released can damage the brakes
and tires.
2. If it remains on after you have
fully released the parking brake
while the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page 235 .
56
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. It reminds you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
A beeper also sounds if you have not
fastened your seat belt.
If you do not fasten your seat belt,
the beeper will stop after a few
seconds but the indicator stays on
until you do. Both the indicator and
the beeper stay off if you fasten your
seat belt before turning on the
ignition switch.
If you continue driving without
fastening your seat belt, the beeper
sounds and the indicator flashes
again at regular intervals.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:00:46 31S9A640 0062 Instrument Panel Indicators
U.S.
Canada
automatically shut off. For more
information, see page 29 .
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and when the ignition
switch is turned to the START (III)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem with the
ABS. If this happens, have your
vehicle checked at a dealer. With
this indicator on, your vehicle still
has normal braking ability but no
anti-lock function. For more
information, see page 168 .
Immobilizer System
Indicator
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. It will
then go off if you have inserted a
properly-coded ignition key. If it is
not a properly-coded key, the
indicator will blink, and the engine
will not start (see page 71 ).
This indicator also blinks several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from the ON (II) position to
the ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK
(0) position.
Side Airbag Off Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. If it comes on at any
other time, it indicates that the
passenger’s side airbag has
57
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and Controls
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at
any other time, it indicates a
potential problem with your front
airbags. This indicator will also alert
you to a potential problem with your
side airbags, passenger’s side airbag
automatic cutoff system, side curtain
airbags, automatic seat belt
tensioners, driver’s seat position
sensor, or the front passenger’s
weight sensors. For more
information, see page 29 .
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:00:58 31S9A640 0063 Instrument Panel Indicators
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If it comes on and stays on at any
other time, or if it does not come on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, there is a
problem with the VSA system. Take
your vehicle to a dealer to have it
checked. Without VSA, your vehicle
still has normal driving ability, but
will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement. See page
170 for more information on the
VSA system.
VSA Activation Indicator
This indicator has three functions.
1. It comes on as a reminder that you
have turned off the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system.
2. It flashes when VSA is active (see
page 170 ).
3. It comes on along with the VSA
system indicator if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. See page 170 for more
information on the VSA system.
58
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Cruise Control Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
138 for information on operating the
cruise control.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:01:12 31S9A640 0064 Instrument Panel Indicators
High Beam Indicator
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page 67 .
On Canadian models, this indicator
comes on with reduced brightness
when the daytime running lights
(DRL) are on (see page 67 ).
Daytime Running Lights
Indicator
Canadian models only
When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signal indicators
and all turn signals on the outside of
the vehicle flash.
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position with the headlight
switch off and the parking brake set.
It should go off if you turn on the
headlights or release the parking
brake. If it comes on at any other
time, it means there is a problem
with the DRL. There may also be a
problem with the high beam
headlights.
This indicator comes on as a
reminder that you must refuel soon.
When the indicator comes on, there
is about 2.74 US gal (10.4 ) of fuel
remaining in the tank before the
needle reaches E. There is a small
reserve of fuel remaining in the tank
when the needle does reach E.
Tailgate and Hatch Glass
Open Indicator
This indicator comes on if the
tailgate or the hatch glass is not
closed tightly.
Door-open Indicator
This indicator comes on if any door
is not closed tightly.
59
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and Controls
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning
Indicators
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If an indicator does not blink
or blinks rapidly, it usually means
one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see page 205 ). Replace
the bulb as soon as possible, since
other drivers cannot see that you are
signaling.
Low Fuel Indicator
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:01:29 31S9A640 0065 Instrument Panel Indicators
Washer Level Indicator
Canadian models only
This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this indicator
(see page 198 ).
Maintenance Required
Indicator
This indicator reminds you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the maintenance schedule
for normal and severe driving
conditions on pages 187 and 188 .
For the first 8,000 miles (12,800 km)
after the maintenance required
indicator is reset, it will come on for
2 seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
Between 8,000 miles (12,800 km)
and 10,000 miles (16,000 km), this
indicator will come on for 2 seconds
when you first turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, and
then flash for 10 seconds.
SELECT/RESET BUTTON
If you exceed 10,000 miles (16,000
km) without having the scheduled
maintenance performed, this
indicator will remain on as a constant
reminder.
Your dealer will reset this indicator
after completing the scheduled
maintenance. If this maintenance is
done by someone other than your
dealer, reset the indicator as follows.
1. Turn off the engine.
60
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Press and hold the Select/Reset
button on the instrument panel,
then turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position.
3. Hold the button for about 10
seconds until the indicator goes
off.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:01:39 31S9A640 0066 Gauges
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR
TACHOMETER
SPEEDOMETER
FUEL GAUGE
Trip Meter
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
Each trip meter works independently,
so you can keep track of two
different distances.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the meter you
last selected is displayed.
SELECT/RESET BUTTON
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
ODOMETER/TRIP METER/
CHECK FUEL CAP INDICATOR
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the Select/Reset
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0.’’
U.S. model is shown.
61
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and Controls
There are two trip meters: Trip A
and Trip B. Switch between these
displays and the odometer display by
pressing the Select/Reset button
repeatedly.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:01:50 31S9A640 0067 Gauges
Odometer
The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial
regulations to disconnect, reset, or
alter the odometer with the intent to
change the number of miles or
kilometers indicated.
Fuel Gauge
This shows how much fuel you have.
It may show slightly more or less
than the actual amount. The needle
returns to the bottom after you turn
off the ignition.
Temperature Gauge
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise
from the bottom white mark to about
the middle of the gauge. In severe
driving conditions, such as very hot
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the pointer may rise to the
upper zone. If it reaches the red
(hot) mark, pull safely to the side of
the road. See page 231 for
instructions and precautions on
checking the engines cooling system.
Outside Temperature Indicator
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
If equipped
This indicator displays the outside
temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.
models) or Centigrade (Canadian
models).
Avoid driving with an extremely low
f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
62
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:02:04 31S9A640 0068 Gauges
The sensor delays the display update
until it reaches the correct outside
temperature. This may take several
minutes.
If the outside temperature is
incorrectly displayed, you can adjust
it up ±5°F in U.S. models (±3°C in
Canadian models) warmer or cooler.
NOTE: The temperature must be
stabilized before doing this
procedure.
To adjust the outside temperature
display, press and hold the Select/
Reset button for 10 seconds. The
following sequence will appear for
one second each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, −5,
−4, −3, −2, −1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2,
3, −3, −2, −1, 0 (Canada).
When it reaches the desired value,
release the Select/Reset button. You
should see the new outside
temperature displayed.
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
Check Fuel Cap Indicator
If your fuel fill cap is loose or
missing, a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’
message appears as text in the
odometer/trip meter display after
you start the engine. The message
appears from CHECK to FUEL, then
to CAP repeatedly.
Turn the engine off and confirm the
fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen
the cap, then retighten it until it
clicks at least once. When you
restart the engine, the message
appears again. To clear, press and
hold the Select/Reset button until
the message is replaced by the
odometer/trip meter display.
If the system still detects a loose or
missing fuel fill cap, the malfunction
indicator lamp (MIL) comes on.
Turn the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL goes
out after 3 days of normal driving
once the cap is tightened or replaced.
If it does not go out, have your
dealer inspect the vehicle. For more
information, see page 234 .
63
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and Controls
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. Therefore, the
temperature reading can be affected
by heat reflection from the road
surface, engine heat, and the
exhaust from surrounding traffic.
This can cause an incorrect
temperature reading when your
speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS
(P.66)
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM ON/OFF
SWITCH
(P.171)
SHIFT LEVER (A/T)
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
(P.161)
(P.67)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/
WASHERS
(P.65)
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
(P.67)
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
(P.30)
MOONROOF SWITCH*2
(P.88)
CRUISE CONTROL
MASTER BUTTON
(P.138)
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS*2
(P.135)
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT
(P.69)
HORN*1
CRUISE CONTROL PARKING BRAKE
BUTTONS
(P.68)
(P.138)
A/T model is shown.
*1 :
*2 :
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
If equipped.
64
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
(P.68)
▼
05/06/30 10:02:10 31S9A640 0069 Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:02:25 31S9A640 0070 Windshield Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wiper
MIST − The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
Rear Window Wiper and Washer
OFF − The wipers are not activated.
Instruments and Controls
INT − The wipers operate every
few seconds.
LO − The wipers run at low speed.
HI − The wipers run at high speed.
1. MIST
2. OFF
3. INT − Intermittent
4. LO − Low speed
5. HI − High speed
6. Windshield washers
Windshield Washers − Pull the
wiper control lever toward you,
and hold it. The washers spray
until you release the lever. The
wipers run at low speed, then
complete one more sweep after
you release the lever.
1. Rotate the switch clockwise to
turn the rear window wiper ON.
The wiper operates every 7
seconds after completing two
sweeps.
2. Hold past ON to turn the rear
window wiper on and to spray the
rear window washer.
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position.
CONTINUED
65
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:02:37 31S9A640 0071 Windshield Wipers and Washers, Turn Signal and Headlights
3. OFF
When you turn the wiper switch to
the ‘‘OFF’’ position or turn off the
ignition switch, the wiper will
return to its parked position.
Turn Signal and Headlights
4. Rotate the switch
counterclockwise to turn the
window wiper on and the window
washer to spray.
The rear wiper will not work if the
hatch glass is not fully closed.
If you open the hatch glass while the
rear wiper is operating, the wiper will
stop. To return the wiper to its
parked position, close the hatch
glass, and then rotate the switch to
the ‘‘OFF’’ position.
1. Turn signal
2. Off
3. Parking and interior lights
4. Headlights
5. High beams
6. Flash high beams
The rear window washer uses the
same fluid reservoir as the windshield washer.
66
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Turn Signal − Push down on the
left lever to signal a left turn and up
to signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever,
and hold it. The lever will return to
center when you release it or
complete a turn.
Headlights − Turning the switch to
the ‘‘
’’ position turns on the
parking lights, taillights, instrument
panel lights, side-marker lights, and
rear license plate lights. Turning the
switch to the ‘‘
’’ position turns
on the headlights. If you leave the
lights on with the key removed from
the ignition switch, you will hear a
reminder tone when you open the
driver’s door.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:02:48 31S9A640 0072 Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button
Instrument Panel Brightness
Hazard Warning Button
To flash the high beams, pull the
lever back lightly, then release it.
The high beams will stay on as long
as you hold the lever back.
Daytime Running Lights
Canadian models only
With the headlight switch off, the
high beam headlights and the high
beam indicator come on with
reduced brightness when you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and release the parking
brake. They remain on until you turn
the ignition switch off, even if you
set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn the switch
to the ‘‘
’’ position.
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL KNOB
Turn the knob on the left side of the
instrument panel to adjust the
brightness of the instrument panel
lights.
Push the button below the center
vents to turn on the hazard warning
lights (four-way flashers). This
causes all four outside turn signals
and both turn indicators in the
instrument panel to flash. Use the
hazard warning lights if you need to
park in a dangerous area near heavy
traffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.
67
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and Controls
High Beams − To turn on high
beams, push the lever forward until
you hear a click. The blue high beam
indicator will come on (see page 59 ).
Pull the lever back to return to the
low beams.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:02:58 31S9A640 0073 Rear Window Defogger, Parking Brake
Rear Window Defogger
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
Parking Brake
The defogger wires on the inside of
the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side-to-side.
PARKING BRAKE
LEVER
To apply the parking brake, firmly
pull the parking brake lever toward
you.
The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The indicator in
the button comes on to show the
defogger is on. It also shuts off when
you turn off the ignition switch. You
have to turn the defogger on again
when you restart the vehicle.
68
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:03:09 31S9A640 0074 Parking Brake, Steering Wheel Adjustment
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
Instruments and Controls
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
RELEASE BUTTON
To release the parking brake, push
and hold the release button on the
side of the parking brake lever, pull
the lever toward you slightly, then
push the lever forward.
1. Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
2. Move the steering wheel so it
points toward your chest, not
toward your face. Make sure you
can see the instrument panel
gauges and indicators.
The parking brake indicator on the
instrument panel should go out when
the parking brake is fully released
with the engine running (see page
56 ).
CONTINUED
69
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:03:20 31S9A640 0075 Steering Wheel Adjustment, Keys and Locks
Keys and Locks
VALET KEY
KEY NUMBER MASTER
KEY WITH (Light Gray)
TAG
REMOTE
TRANSMITTER
You should have received a key
number tag with your keys. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
only Honda-approved key blanks.
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
3. Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in position.
4. Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up and down.
The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle. The valet key works
only in the ignition, the door locks,
and the tailgate. You can keep the
glove box locked when you leave
your vehicle and the valet key at a
parking facility.
70
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:03:29 31S9A640 0076 Immobilizer System
The Immobilizer System protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly-coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine’s fuel
system is disabled.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle undriveable.
If you have lost your key and cannot
start your engine, contact your
dealer.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
fob) is near the ignition switch when
you insert the key.
71
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and Controls
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on for
a few seconds, then go out. If the
indicator starts to blink, it means the
system does not recognize the
coding of the key. Turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position,
remove the key, reinsert it, and turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position again.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your dealer.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:03:38 31S9A640 0077 Ignition Switch
The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), and START (III).
LOCK (0) − You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, push it in slightly. If
your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the shift lever must
also be in park.
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the key. Firmly turn the
steering wheel to the left or right as
you turn the key.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the LOCK (0) or
the ACCESSORY (I) position and
open the driver’s door. Remove the
key to turn off the beeper.
ACCESSORY (I) − You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power socket in this
position.
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the shift lever must be
in Park before you can remove the
key from the ignition switch.
ON (II) − This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
indicators on the instrument panel
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
position.
START (III) − Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.
72
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Removing the key from the
ignition switch while driving
locks the steering. This can
cause you to lose control.
Remove the key from the
ignition switch only when
parked.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:03:49 31S9A640 0078 Door Locks
Power Door Locks
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
To lock the doors and the tailgate,
press the master door lock switch on
either front door, press the lock tab
down on the driver’s door, or use the
key on the outside lock on the driver’s
door.
To lock any passenger’s door when
getting out of the vehicle, push the
lock tab down, and close the door.
To lock the driver’s door, remove the
key from the ignition switch, pull the
outside door handle and push the
lock tab down or push the door lock
switch down. Release the handle,
then close the door.
Only the driver’s door unlocks when
you use the key on the outside
driver’s door lock.
Pressing up on either master door
lock switch will unlock all of the
doors and the tailgate.
Childproof Door Locks
LEVER
Lock
The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position, the door
cannot be opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock
tab. To open the door, pull the lock
tab up, and use the outside door
handle.
73
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and Controls
LOCK TAB
The lock tab on any door locks and
unlocks that door. Pulling up on the
driver’s door lock tab only unlocks
the driver’s door.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:04:02 31S9A640 0079 Tailgate and Hatch Glass
HATCH GLASS RELEASE BUTTON
Use the valet or master key in the
tailgate to:
1. Unlock the tailgate. Pull the
handle to open it.
2. Lock the tailgate.
3. Open the hatch glass. You can
also open it by pressing the hatch
glass release button on the driver’s
door or on the remote transmitter.
The rear wiper will not operate with
the hatch glass open. If you open the
hatch glass while the rear wiper is
operating, the wiper will stop (see
page 65 ).
STOP
To close the hatch glass, lower it and
press on the handle until it latches.
To keep the tailgate door open when
facing downhill, use the stop from
the tool kit.
The tool kit is in the storage bin
under the cargo floor. Put the stop
on the support strut as shown.
Make sure to remove the stop before
closing the tailgate.
You can also lock and unlock the
tailgate with the remote transmitter,
or either master door lock switch.
Be sure all passengers or any objects
are clear of the tailgate before
opening or closing it.
74
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:04:13 31S9A640 0080 Tailgate and Hatch Glass, Remote Transmitter
Remote Transmitter
LOCK
BUTTON
UNLOCK
BUTTON
LED
HATCH
GLASS
RELEASE
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
LOCK − Press this button once to
lock all doors and the tailgate. Some
exterior lights will flash once. When
you push LOCK twice within 5
seconds, you will hear a beep to
verify that the doors and the tailgate
are locked. You cannot lock the
doors and the tailgate if any door or
the tailgate is not fully closed or the
key is in the ignition switch.
UNLOCK − Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door. Push it
twice to unlock the other doors and
the tailgate. Some exterior lights will
flash twice each time you press the
button.
The ceiling light (if the ceiling light
switch is in the center position) will
come on when you press the
UNLOCK button. If you do not open
any door or the tailgate within 30
seconds, the light fades out. If you
relock the doors and the tailgate
with the remote transmitter before
30 seconds have elapsed, the light
will go off immediately.
If you do not open any door or the
tailgate within 30 seconds, they will
automatically relock.
CONTINUED
75
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and Controls
Keep the tailgate and the hatch glass
closed at all times while driving to
avoid damaging the tailgate and the
hatch glass, and to prevent exhaust
gas from getting into the interior.
See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on
page 50 .
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:04:25 31S9A640 0081 Remote Transmitter
HATCH GLASS RELEASE −
Press this button for about 1 second
to open the hatch glass. You cannot
open the hatch glass if the key is in
the ignition switch. Even if the hatch
glass is open, the tailgate can be
locked with the remote transmitter.
PANIC − Press this button for
about 2 seconds to attract attention:
the horn will sound, and the exterior
lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
To cancel panic mode, press any
other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
Remote Transmitter Care
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Replacing the Transmitter
Battery
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
SCREW
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors
and the tailgate, replace the battery
as soon as possible.
Battery type: CR1616
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
76
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:04:34 31S9A640 0082 Remote Transmitter
2. Separate the transmitter by prying
its middle seam with your
fingernail.
4. Remove the old battery, and insert
a new battery into the back of the
cover with the + side facing down.
5. Install the parts in reverse order.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
TAB
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
3. Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
by releasing the two tabs on the
cover.
77
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and Controls
BATTERY
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:04:43 31S9A640 0083 Seats
Seat Adjustments
See pages 11 − 13 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seatbacks.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
FRONT SEAT
To adjust the front or rear seat
forward and backward, pull up on the
bar under the seat cushion’s front
edge. Try to move the seat to make
sure it is locked in position.
78
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
To change the seat-back angle of the
front seat, pull up on the lever on the
outside of the seat bottom.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:04:57 31S9A640 0084 Seats
Armrests
The height of the driver’s seat is
adjustable. Turn the dial on the
outside of the seat cushion.
The rear seat armrest is in the
center of the rear seat. Pivot it down
to use it.
REAR SEAT
To change the angle of the rear seatback, pull up on the release lever on
the outside of the seat-back.
When using the center seating
position, adjust the left and right side
of the rear seats to the same position.
Only on vehicles with an automatic
transmission
Each front seat has an armrest on
the side of the seat-back. To use it,
pivot it down.
Make sure all rear shoulder belts are
positioned in front of the rear seatbacks after you adjust the rear seats.
79
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and Controls
Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:05:08 31S9A640 0085 Seats
Head Restraints
See page 13 for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.
They are most effective when you
adjust them so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint.
FRONT
RELEASE BUTTON
The head restraints adjust for height.
You need both hands to adjust the
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.
80
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
REAR
RELEASE BUTTON
To remove a head restraint for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
it will go. Push the release button,
then pull the restraint out of the seatback.
Make sure the removed head
restraints are securely stored.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:05:19 31S9A640 0086 Seats
4. Move the front seat backward
until it touches the rear seat.
5. Adjust the rear seat-back to the
desired position.
SLIDE BAR
SEAT-BACK ANGLE
ADJUSTMENT LEVER
You can recline the seat-backs on the
front seats so they are level with the
rear seat cushions, making a large
cushioned area. To do this:
2. Remove the head restraints from
the front seats (see page 80 ).
Make sure the removed head
restraints are securely stored.
1. Adjust the rear seats as far back
as they will go.
Reverse this procedure to return the
front and rear seats to the upright
position. Make sure you install the
head restraints and securely lock the
seats before driving.
When you return the seat-back to
the upright position, hold the seatback to keep it from going up too
quickly.
81
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and Controls
3. Adjust the front seats forward as
far as they will go. Pull up the seatback angle adjustment lever and
pivot the seat-back backward until
it is level with the rear seat
cushion.
Reclining the Front Seats
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:05:32 31S9A640 0087 Seats
Folding the Rear Seats Down
The rear seat-back can be folded
down to give more cargo room. Each
side folds down separately, so you
can still carry a passenger in the rear
seat.
You can also fold up each of the rear
seats separately to create further
cargo space (see page 83 ).
LATCH PLATE
When you are folding the right half
of the rear seat, use the key to
release the center seat belt from the
detachable anchor (see page 85 ).
Allow the seat belt to retract into the
holder on the ceiling and store the
buckles in it.
RELEASE LEVER
2. Lower the head restraint to its
lowest position.
3. Pull up on the release lever on the
outside of the seat-back.
4. Fold the seat-back forward.
Do not put any heavy items on the
seat-back when it is folded.
BUCKLE
1. Push the seat belt buckles into the
seat cushion.
82
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:05:43 31S9A640 0088 Seats
Reverse this procedure to return the
seat-back to the upright position.
Make sure the seat is secured and
the seat belt in front of the seat-back
before driving.
Folding the Rear Seat Up
LOCK RELEASE STRAP
To fold up the rear seat:
1. Pull up the bar under the seat
cushion and slide the rear seat
backward. The rear seat will not
fold up if it is not back as far as it
will go.
2. Follow steps 1 through 4 on page
82 for folding down the seatback.
3. Unlock the seat from the floor by
pulling the lock release strap
under the seat cushion’s back
edge, then lift the rear of the seat.
You cannot fold up the rear seat if
it is not latched securely in the
rearmost position.
4. Slide the seat forward.
CONTINUED
83
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and Controls
SLIDE BAR
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:05:53 31S9A640 0089 Seats
HOOK
Reverse this procedure to return the
seat to the upright position.
Make sure the seat is securely
latched before driving.
When you are not using the
fastening strap, roll up the strap and
store it properly into the slit on the
seat-back.
FASTENING
STRAP
Make sure all rear shoulder belts are
positioned in front of the rear seatbacks.
HOOK
5. Pull out the fastening strap from
the slit on the seat-back. Move the
front seat forward slightly, then
attach the anchor on the fastening
strap to the hook on the bottom of
the front seat. Adjust the front
seat to the desired position.
6. Pull the fastening strap tab toward
the slit to tighten the strap, and
make sure the seat is secure.
ANCHOR
Make sure that the folded up rear
seat does not interfere with the front
passenger’s seat-back. This will
cause the front passenger’s weight
sensors to work improperly (see
page 25 ). Also check the passenger
airbag off indicator to assure proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag.
84
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
In the center seating position of the
rear seat, be sure the detachable
anchor is latched securely before
using the seat belt (see page 85 ).
Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard (See Carrying Cargo
on page 150 ).
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:06:03 31S9A640 0090 Seats
SMALL BUCKLE
Using a seat belt with the
detachable anchor unlatched
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash.
Before using the seat belt,
make sure the detachable
anchor is correctly latched.
SMALL LATCH
PLATE
Instruments and Controls
Detachable Anchor
The seat belt in the rear center seat
is equipped with a detachable anchor.
This allows the center seat belt to be
unlatched when the right side of the
rear seat is folded.
TRIANGLE
MARKS
To unlatch the detachable anchor,
insert a key into the slot on the side
of the small buckle. Line up the
triangle marks on the plate and
buckle when reattaching the belt and
buckle.
Line up the triangle marks on the
small latch plate and buckle when
reattaching the belt and buckle.
Tug on the seat belt to verify that
the detachable anchor is securely
latched. Make sure the seat belt is
not twisted.
85
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:06:11 31S9A640 0091 Seat Heaters, Power Windows
Seat Heaters
DRIVER’S SEAT HEATER SWITCH
Do not use the seat heaters when the
engine is off or when idling for a
long period of time. They can drain
the battery, making your vehicle
hard to start.
Power Windows
DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH
MAIN SWITCH
PASSENGER’S SEAT HEATER SWITCH
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position to raise or lower any
window. To open the window, push
the switch down and hold it. Release
the switch when you want to stop the
window. Pull back on the switch and
hold it to close the window.
If equipped
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters in the seat bottoms only.
Because of sensors for the side
airbag system, there are no heaters
in the seat-back in either the driver
or passenger seats. The ignition
switch must be in the ON (II)
position to use them. Push the
heater switch to turn the power on or
off. The indicators will come on and
remain on while the heaters are on.
86
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:06:21 31S9A640 0092 Power Windows
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
AUTO − To open or close the
driver’s window, push or pull the
window switch firmly down or up to
the second detent, and release it.
The window will automatically go up
or down all the way. To stop the
window, pull or push the window
switch briefly.
AUTO REVERSE − If the driver’s
window senses any obstacle while it
is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction, and then stop. To
close the window, remove the
obstacle, then use the window switch
again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
driver’s window fuse is removed, the
AUTO function will be disabled. The
power window system needs to be
reset after reconnecting the battery
or installing the fuse.
1. Start the engine. Push down and
hold the driver’s window switch
until the window is fully open.
2. Pull and hold the driver’s window
switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch
for about 2 seconds.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.
When you push the MAIN switch in,
the switch is OFF, and the passenger
windows cannot be raised or lowered.
To cancel this feature, push on the
switch again to get it to pop out.
Keep the MAIN switch off when you
87
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and Controls
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
have children in the vehicle so they
do not injure themselves by
operating the windows
unintentionally.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:06:33 31S9A640 0093 Moonroof, Mirrors
Moonroof
hold the bottom of the switch
(
).
Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Mirrors
TAB
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
If equipped
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and use the switch
under the left dashboard vent to
operate the moonroof.
To tilt up the back of the moonroof,
press and hold the center button
(
).
To close the moonroof, press and
hold the top of the switch (
).
To open the moonroof, press and
If you try to open the moonroof in
below-f reezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or motor.
88
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Keep the inside and outside mirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:06:43 31S9A640 0094 Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
SELECTOR SWITCH
3. Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirror right, left, up, or down.
Power Mirror Heaters
Instruments and Controls
4. When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns the
adjustment switch off to keep your
settings.
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRRORS BUTTON
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
If equipped
The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the rear window defogger
button. The indicator in the button
comes on as a reminder. Press the
button again to turn the heaters and
the defogger off.
2. Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
89
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:06:50 31S9A640 0095 Interior Convenience Items
COAT HOOK
ACCESSORY
POWER
SOCKET
DRIVER’S
POCKET
SUN VISOR
SUNGLASSES
HOLDER
VANITY MIRROR
DASHBOARD POCKET
PASSENGER’S
TRAY
BUILT-IN TABLE
*1 : M/T model only
*2 : A/T model only
BEVERAGE
HOLDERS in
REAR SEAT
ARMREST
ACCESSORY
CENTER
TABLE with POWER SOCKET
BEVERAGE
HOLDERS
90
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
BEVERAGE CENTER*2 GLOVE BOX
HOLDER*2/ POCKET
COIN TRAY*1
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:07:00 31S9A640 0096 Interior Convenience Items
Built-in Table
HANDLE
The cargo area floor can be taken
out and used as a table.
To remove the table, pull up the
carpet. Lift and pull on the handle to
slide the table out.
Only on models with an automatic
transmission
To use the front beverage holder,
pull on the handle.
CONTINUED
91
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and Controls
Beverage Holders
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. Spilled liquid that
is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Spilled liquids can also
damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the
interior.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:07:12 31S9A640 0097 Interior Convenience Items
Using the Built-in Table
Be sure to lock the legs of the
table.
Do not sit or stand on the table.
Do not put a weight of over 44 lbs
(20 kg) on the table.
Hot items such as pots, pans, or
kettles should not be placed
directly on the tabletop.
Unfold the legs. Lock them in place
by pushing on the middle of the
locking arms. Make sure all four are
locked.
To fold the legs, pull on the middle
of each locking arm.
To put the table back in place, hold
onto the handle and put the
projection on the table into the hole
in the cargo area floor.
92
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:07:22 31S9A640 0098 Interior Convenience Items
Glove Box
Coin Tray
Instruments and Controls
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
Lock
Open the glove box by pulling the
bottom of the handle. Close it with a
firm push. Lock or unlock the glove
box with the master key.
Only on models with a manual
transmission
To open the coin tray, pull on the
bottom edge. The light in the tray
comes on when the parking lights
are on.
The glove box light comes on only
when the parking lights are on.
93
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:07:31 31S9A640 0099 Interior Convenience Items
Sunglasses Holder
Center Table
Push
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
To open the sunglasses holder, push
on the front edge. Make sure the
holder is closed while you are driving.
To use the center table, pull up the
outside edge of the table until it
latches. To store it, pull the lever and
lower the table.
Some larger styles of sunglasses
may not fit in the holder.
Sitting on or getting under the table,
or putting heavy objects on the table,
may damage or deform it.
Do not put any items on the table
while driving. They may fall down or
fly around when you go around
corners or brake hard.
94
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:07:49 31S9A640 0100 Interior Convenience Items, Interior Lights
Accessory Power Sockets
These sockets are intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
Center Pocket
Ceiling Light
None of the sockets will power an
automotive type cigarette lighter
element. When more than one
socket is being used, the combined
power rating of the accessories
should be 120 watts or less
(10 amps).
ON
OFF
DOOR ACTIVATED
Only on models with an automatic
transmission
Open the center pocket by pulling
the handle.
Sun Visor
To use the sun visor, pull it down.
When using the sun visor for the
side window, remove the support rod
from the clip, and swing it out.
The ceiling light has a three-position
switch; ON, Door Activated, and
OFF. In the Door Activated (center)
position, the light comes on when
you:
Open any door.
Unlock the doors and the tailgate
with the key or remote transmitter.
CONTINUED
95
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and Controls
To use an accessory power socket,
the ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:07:59 31S9A640 0101 Interior Lights
After all doors are closed tightly, the
light fades out in about 30 seconds.
Spotlights
Cargo Area Light
The ceiling light (with the switch in
the center position) comes on when
you remove the key from the ignition
switch. If you do not open a door, the
light fades out in about 30 seconds.
ON
OFF
If you leave any door or the tailgate
open with the key not in the ignition
switch, the ceiling light will go off
after 3 minutes.
TAILGATE/HATCH GLASS ACTIVATED
Turn on the spotlight by pushing the
button. Push the button again to turn
it off. You can use the spotlights at
all times.
Ignition Switch Light
The ignition switch light comes on
when you open the driver’s door. It
fades out in about 30 seconds after
the door is closed.
96
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
The cargo area light has a threeposition switch. In the OFF position,
the light does not come on. In the
center position, the light comes on
when you open the tailgate or the
hatch glass. In the ON position, the
light stays on continuously.
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:08:05 31S9A640 0102 Features
The heating and air conditioning
system in your vehicle provides a
comfortable driving environment in
all weather conditions.
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
97
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Features
The standard audio system has
many features. This section describes those features and how to
use them.
Vents, Heating, and A/C ................ 98
Audio System ................................. 103
Playing the Radio ....................105, 116
Playing a Disc ..........................109, 124
Disc Changer ..........................111, 125
Disc Player/Changer Error
Messages .............................112, 128
Playing a Tape .........................113, 129
Caring for the Tape and
Player ...................................115, 131
Playing the XM Satellite Radio .. 120
Radio Reception ............................. 132
Protecting Your Discs ................... 134
Remote Audio Controls................. 135
Radio Theft Protection.................. 136
Setting the Clock ........................... 137
Cruise Control ................................ 138
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
Vents, Heating, and A/C
FAN CONTROL
DIAL
MODE CONTROL
DIAL
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRRORS BUTTON
(If equipped)
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING
(A/C) BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
BUTTON
98
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
▼
05/06/30 10:08:10 31S9A640 0103 Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:08:36 31S9A640 0104 Vents, Heating, and A/C
Air Flow Buttons
Fan Control Dial
Turn this dial to increase or decrease
the fan speed and airflow.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
This button turns the air
conditioning on and off. The
indicator in the button is on when
the A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
When the recirculation indicator is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
The system should be left in fresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
Mode Control Dial
Use the mode control dial to select
the vents the air flows from. Some
air will flow from the dashboard
corner vents in all modes.
The system automatically
turns on the A/C and switches to
recirculation mode. Air flows from
the center and side vents in the
dashboard.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Rear Window Defogger Button
This button turns the rear window
defogger off and on (see page 68 ).
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
On some models, this button also
controls the heated mirror function
(see page 89 ).
Air flows from the floor
vents. When you select
, the
system automatically switches to
fresh air mode.
CONTINUED
99
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Features
Temperature Control Dial
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the airflow.
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:08:54 31S9A640 0105 Vents, Heating, and A/C
Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
When you select
or
,
the system automatically switches to
fresh air mode and turns on the A/C.
In this case, you cannot turn the A/C
off.
Ventilation
The flow-through ventilation system
draws in outside air, circulates it
through the interior, then exhausts it
through vents near the tailgate.
Using the Heater
The heater uses engine coolant to
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it
will be several minutes before you
feel warm air coming from the
system.
.
1. Select
When you select
, the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode.
2. Set the fan to the desired speed.
3. Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.
1. Set the temperature to the lower
limit.
2. Make sure the A/C is off.
and fresh air mode.
3. Select
4. Set the fan to the desired speed.
100
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Using the A/C
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
62 ). If it moves near the red zone,
turn off the A/C until the gauge
reading returns to normal.
1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. The indicator in the button
comes on when a fan speed is
selected.
2. Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
.
3. Select
4. If the outside air is humid, select
recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select fresh air mode.
5. Set the fan to the desired speed.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:09:05 31S9A640 0106 Vents, Heating, and A/C
To cool the interior with MAX A/C:
If the interior is very warm, you can
cool it down more rapidly by partially
opening the windows, turning on the
A/C, and setting the fan to
maximum speed in fresh air mode.
1. Turn the fan on.
2. Turn on the air conditioning.
and fresh air mode.
3. Select
4. Adjust the temperature to your
preference.
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
To Defog and Defrost
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
1. Set the fan to the desired speed or
high for faster defrosting.
. The system
2. Select
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. The
A/C indicator will not come on, if
it was previously off.
3. Adjust the temperature so the
airflow feels warm.
to help clear the
4. Select
rear window and the outside
mirrors (if equipped).
5. To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the corner vents.
101
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Features
1. Set the fan to the desired speed.
2. Select MAX A/C mode.
The system automatically turns on
the A/C, selects
, and
switches to recirculation mode.
3. Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
To Dehumidify the Interior
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:09:17 31S9A640 0107 Vents, Heating, and A/C
When you select
or
,
the system automatically switches to
fresh air mode and turns on the A/C.
This helps to dehumidify the air and
to defog the windshield. In either
mode, you cannot turn off the A/C.
When you switch to another mode,
the A/C returns to its original setting,
either on or off, as displayed by the
A/C indicator.
To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
From the Windows
. The system
1. Select
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. The
A/C indicator does not come on if
it was previously off.
.
2. Select
3. Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum level.
To clear the windows faster, you can
close the dashboard corner vents by
rotating the wheel below each vent.
This sends more warm air to the
windshield defroster vents. Once the
windshield is clear, select fresh air
mode to avoid fogging the windows.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
102
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
To Turn Everything Off
Turning the fan speed control dial all
the way to the left shuts the system
off.
Keep the system off for short
periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/07/13 14:24:31 31S9A640 0108 Audio System
Some models may have one of the
audio systems described in this
section. Read the appropriate pages
in this section for operation of the
audio systems installed in your
vehicle.
U.S. LX and Canadian SE model
Features
page 105 to 115 for U.S. LX model,
Canadian SE model
page 116 to 131 for U.S. EX, SE
models, Canadian EX, EX-L
models
If your vehicle has a different audio
system refer to its manual for
operating instructions.
103
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
Audio System
Canadian EX and EX-L models
U.S. EX and SE models
104
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
▼
05/06/30 10:09:32 31S9A640 0109 Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/07/13 14:24:36 31S9A640 0110 Playing the Radio
U.S. LX and Canadian SE model
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
PRESET BUTTONS
TUNE KNOB
Features
TREBLE/
BALANCE
BASS/
FADE
SCAN BUTTON
FM BUTTON
AM BUTTON
SEEK BUTTONS
AUTO SELECT BUTTON
105
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:09:46 31S9A640 0111 Playing the Radio
To Play the Radio
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
PWR/VOL knob or the AM or FM
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the PWR/VOL knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM or
FM button. On the FM band, ST will
be displayed if the station is
broadcasting in stereo.
Stereo reproduction on AM is not
available.
To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, the
preset buttons, and AUTO SELECT .
TUNE − Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
lower frequency.
SEEK − The SEEK function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
+ or ○
− SEEK button, then
press the ○
release it.
106
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SCAN − The SCAN function
samples all stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it. You will see SCAN in
the display. The system will scan for
a station with a strong signal. When
it finds one, it will stop and play that
station for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:09:57 31S9A640 0112 Playing the Radio
Preset − Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
2. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCAN
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
3. Pick a preset button and hold it
until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
The preset frequencies will be lost if
your vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
To turn off auto select, press the
A. SEL button. This restores the
presets you originally set.
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’
flashes in the display, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds. It stores the frequencies of
six AM and twelve FM stations in
the preset buttons.
Features
1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
button.
AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
107
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:10:09 31S9A640 0113 Playing the Radio
Adjusting the Sound
BAL − Adjust the balance or sideto-side strength of the sound.
FAD − Adjust the fader or the
front-to-back strength of the sound.
TRE − Adjust the treble in the
sound.
BAS − Adjust the bass in the sound.
BAS/FAD: Press the knob to pop it
out. Turn it to adjust the Bass level.
Pull it out slightly farther to adjust
the Fade, or front-to-back strength.
Push the knob back in when you are
done adjusting the sound.
TRE/BAL: Press the knob to pop it
out. Turn it to adjust the Treble level.
Pull it out slightly farther to adjust
the balance, or side-to-side strength.
Push the knob back in when you are
done adjusting the sound.
108
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Audio System Lighting
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page 67 ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is off.
Radio Frequencies and Reception
For information, see page 132 .
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/07/13 14:24:42 31S9A640 0114 Playing a Disc
U.S. LX and Canadian SE model
CD EJECT BUTTON
CD SLOT
SKIP BUTTONS
Features
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
REPEAT BUTTON
CD BUTTON
RANDOM BUTTON
109
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:10:28 31S9A640 0115 Playing a Disc
To Play a CD
To load or play CDs, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON(II) position.
You operate the CD player with the
same controls used for the radio. To
select the CD player, press the CD
button. The number of the track
playing is shown in the display. The
system will continuously play a CD
until you change modes.
Insert a CD into the CD slot. The
drive will pull the CD in the rest of
the way to play it. When the system
reaches the end of the disc, it will
return to the beginning and play the
disc again.
You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discs
without using an adapter ring.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
To play the radio when a CD is
playing, press the AM or FM button.
Press the CD button again to switch
back to the CD player.
To play the tape when a CD is
playing, insert a tape in the player. If
a tape is in the player, press the
TAPE button. Press the CD button
again to switch back to the CD
player.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
you turn the system back on, the CD
will begin playing where it left off.
110
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
To Change or Select Tracks
SKIP − Each time you press and
+ skip button, the player
release the ○
skips forward to the beginning of the
−
next track. Press and release the ○
skip button, to skip backward to the
beginning of the current track. Press
it again to skip to the beginning of
the previous track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
+ or ○
− skip button.
and hold the ○
REPEAT − To continuously replay
a track, press and release the RPT
button. You will see REPEAT in the
display. Press it again to turn it off.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:10:43 31S9A640 0116 Playing a Disc
RANDOM − This feature plays the
tracks in random order. To activate
random play, press and release the
RDM button. You will see RDM in
the display. Press it again to return
to normal play.
To Stop Playing a CD
Press the eject button (
) to
remove the CD. If you eject the CD,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the CD after 10 seconds and put it in
pause mode. To begin playing, press
the CD button.
If a tape is in the tape player, press
the TAPE button to switch to the
tape while a CD is playing. Press the
CD button again to switch back to
the CD player.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
you turn the system back on, the CD
will begin playing where it left off.
Protecting Discs
For information on how to handle
and protect discs, see page 134 .
Operating Optional CD Changer
An optional six disc CD changer is
available from your dealer.
This disc changer uses the same
controls used for the in-dash CD
player or the radio.
Load the desired CDs in the
magazine, and load the magazine in
the changer according to the
instructions that came with it.
To select the CD changer, press the
CD button. The CD and track
numbers will be displayed. To select
a different CD, use the preset 5
(DISC −) button to select the
previous disc, or the preset 6 (DISC
+) button to select the next disc in
sequence. If you select an empty slot
in the magazine, the changer will
search for the next available CD to
load and play.
111
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Features
SCAN − The SCAN function
samples all the tracks on the disc in
the order they are recorded on the
CD. To activate it, press and hold the
SCAN button. You will see SCAN in
the display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of each track on the CD.
Press the SCAN button again to get
out of the system and play the last
track sampled.
Press the AM or FM button to
switch to the radio while a CD is
playing. To play the CD, press the
CD button.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:10:55 31S9A640 0117 Disc Player/Changer Error Messages
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a CD, find the
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take
the vehicle to your dealer.
CD Player
Error
Message
Cause
Mechanical Error
High temperature
Focus Error
CD Changer
Error
Message
Cause
High temperature
No CD in magazine
Focus Error
Mechanical Error
112
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Solution
Press the CD eject button and pull out the CD.
Check it for damage or deformation.
If the CD cannot be pulled out, or the error
message does not disappear after the CD is
ejected, see your dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Press the eject button and pull out the CD.
Check if it is inserted correctly in the CD player.
Make sure the CD is not scratched or damaged.
Solution
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Insert CDs in magazine.
Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.
Check for an error message, and insert the CDs
again. If the message does not disappear or the
CDs cannot be pulled out, see your dealer.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/07/13 14:24:47 31S9A640 0118 Playing a Tape
U.S. LX and Canadian SE model
PWR/VOL KNOB
PLAY BUTTON
REW BUTTON
FF BUTTON
DOLBY BUTTON
TAPE EJECT
BUTTON
SKIP BUTTONS
REPEAT BUTTON
PROG BUTTON
TAPE SLOT
113
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Features
TAPE DIRECTION
INDICATOR
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:11:12 31S9A640 0119 Playing a Tape
To Play a Tape
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position. Make sure the open side of
the tape is facing right, then insert
the tape most of the way into the slot.
The system will pull the tape in the
rest of the way and begin to play it.
Dolby* noise reduction turns on
when you insert a tape. The
indicator will light in the
display. If the tape was not recorded
in Dolby, turn it off by pressing the
button. Dolby remains off until
you press the
button again.
*
The tape direction indicator in the
display comes on to show you which
side of the tape is playing. The ▲
indicates the side you inserted
upward is now playing. If you want to
play the other side, press the PROG
button. When the player reaches the
end of the tape, it will automatically
reverse direction and play the other
side.
Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
To Stop Playing a Tape
To remove the tape, press the eject
button. If you want to turn the player
off, press the PWR/VOL knob or
turn off the ignition. The tape will
remain in the drive. When you turn
the system back on, the tape will
begin playing where it left off.
114
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
To switch to the radio or CD player
while a tape is playing, press the AM,
FM, or CD button. To change back
to the tape player, press the TAPE
button.
Tape Search Functions
FF/REW − To rewind the tape,
push the REW button. You will see
REW in the display. To fast forward
the tape, push the FF button. You
will see FF displayed. Press the FF,
REW, or PLAY button to take the
system out of rewind or fast forward.
− button to find
SKIP − Press the ○
the beginning of the current song or
+ button to find
passage. Press the ○
the beginning of the next song or
passage. When the system reaches
the beginning of a song or passage, it
begins to play it.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:11:24 31S9A640 0120 Playing a Tape
REPEAT − Press the RPT button
to continuously play a song or
passage. You will see REPEAT
displayed. The track will repeat until
you press the RPT button again.
If you do not clean the tape player
regularly, it may eventually become
impossible to remove the
contamination with a normal
cleaning kit. Your dealer has a
cleaning kit available.
Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.
Tapes longer than that may break or
jam the drive.
If the tape is loose, tighten it by
turning the hub with a pencil or your
finger. If the label is peeling off,
remove it or it could cause the tape
to jam in the player. Never try to
insert a warped or damaged tape in
the player.
Store tapes in their cases to protect
them from dust and moisture. Never
place tapes where they will be
exposed to direct sunlight, high heat,
or high humidity. If a tape is exposed
to extreme heat or cold, let it reach a
moderate temperature before
inserting it into the player.
Never try to insert foreign objects
into the tape player.
If you see the error message
‘‘
’’ on the display, press the
tape eject button to remove the tape
from the unit. Make sure the tape is
not damaged. If the tape will not
eject or the error message stays on
after the tape ejects, take your
vehicle to your dealer.
115
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Features
NOTE: The skip and repeat
functions use silent periods on the
tape to find the end of a song or
passage. These features may not
work if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level, or a silent period in the middle
of a selection.
Caring for the Tape and Player
The tape player picks up dirt and
oxides from the tape. This
contamination builds up over time
and causes the sound quality to
degrade. To prevent this, you should
clean the player after every 30 hours
of use.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:11:31 31S9A640 0121 Playing the Radio
Canadian EX and EX-L models
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
FM/AM
BUTTON
U.S. EX and SE models
STEREO
INDICATOR
TUNE/SOUND
KNOB
AUTO
SELECT
BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
FM/AM
BUTTON
STEREO
TUNE/SOUND
INDICATOR KNOB
AUTO
SELECT
BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
SEEK BUTTONS
SCAN BUTTON
116
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
PRESET BUTTONS
SEEK BUTTONS
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:11:41 31S9A640 0122 Playing the Radio
To Play the Radio
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position. Turn the system on by
pushing the PWR/VOL knob or the
FM/AM button. Adjust the volume
by turning the PWR/VOL knob.
Optional for U.S. EX and SE models.
XM satellite radio information is
available on page 120 .
TUNE − Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
lower frequency.
SEEK − The SEEK function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
+ or ○
− SEEK button, then
press the ○
release it.
SCAN − The SCAN function
samples all stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it. You will see SCAN in
the display. The system will scan for
a station with a strong signal. When
it finds one, it will stop and play that
station for about 5 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 5 seconds. When it plays a
station you want to listen to, press
the SCAN button again.
117
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Features
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the FM/AM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is broadcasting in stereo. Stereo reproduction on
AM is not available.
To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, the
preset buttons, and AUTO SELECT .
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
Playing the Radio
Preset − Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
button.
2. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCAN
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
3. Pick a preset button and hold it
until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
The preset frequencies will be lost if
your vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’
flashes in the display, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds. It stores the frequencies of
six AM and twelve FM stations in
the preset buttons.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
118
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
To turn off auto select, press the
A. SEL button. This restores the
presets you originally set.
▼
05/06/30 10:11:52 31S9A640 0123 Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:12:02 31S9A640 0124 Playing the Radio
Adjusting the Sound
BAL − Adjust the balance or sideto-side strength of the sound.
FAD − Adjust the fader or the
front-to-back strength of the sound.
BAS − Adjust the bass in the sound.
Each mode is shown in the display as
it changes. Turn the SOUND knob
to adjust the setting to your liking.
When the level reaches the center,
you will see a ‘‘C’’ in the display. The
system will return to the audio
display about 5 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.
Audio System Lighting
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page 67). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is off.
Radio Frequencies and Reception
For information, see page 132 .
119
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Features
TRE − Adjust the treble in the
sound.
Press the SOUND knob repeatedly
to display the Bass (BAS), Treble
(TRE), Fader (FAD), and Balance
(BAL) settings.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (optional)
Optional on U.S. EX and SE models
CATEGORY MODE INDICATOR
DISPLAY
BUTTON
TUNE KNOB
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
SEEK/SKIP
BUTTONS
SCAN BUTTON
PRESET
BUTTONS
SATELLITE RADIO
BUTTON
120
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
PRESET BUTTONS
▼
05/06/30 10:12:07 31S9A640 0125 Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:12:24 31S9A640 0126 Playing the XM Satellite Radio (optional)
Satellite Digital Radio
Optional on U.S. EX and SE models
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
XM satellite radio anywhere in the
United States except Hawaii and
Alaska.
To Play XM Satellite Radio
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position.
Turn the system on:
Push any of the following: PWR/
VOL knob or the CD/XM button.
Turn the PWR/VOL knob to adjust
the volume.
To Select a Channel
When in the satellite radio mode,
TUNE − Turn the TUNE knob to
change channel selection. Turn the
knob right for higher numbered
channels and left for lower
numbered channels.
SEEK/SKIP − The SEEK/SKIP
function selects the various
categories in XM, such as Jazz/Blues,
+ to
Rock, Classical, etc. Push the ○
change the category forward. Push
− to change the category
the ○
backward. To search for channels
within a category, turn the TUNE
knob clockwise.
DISP − Press and release this
button to change the display. The
display will change in the following
sequence: channel name, channel
number, category, artist name, and
music title.
Press and hold this button for more
than 2 seconds to change the mode
between the channel number and the
category.
SCAN − The scan function samples
all channels for 5 seconds. To
activate the function, push the SCAN
button. Push it again to get out of the
sequence.
Preset − Each preset button can
store one channel in XM1 and one in
XM2.
1. Push the CD/XM button, you will
see XM1 or XM2.
2. Use the TUNE, SEEK or SCAN
function to tune the radio to a
desired channel.
3. Pick a preset button and hold it
until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on XM1 and six on
XM2.
121
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Features
XM is a registered trademark of
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
Satellite radio is available in U.S.
models only.
you can use any of three methods to
find channels: TUNE, SEEK/SKIP,
and SCAN.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:12:31 31S9A640 0127 Playing the XM Satellite Radio (optional)
Signal may be
blocked by
mountains or
large obstacles
to the south.
Satellite Radio Signals
Satellite radio receives signals from
two satellites to produce clear, highquality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, satellite
radio also allows you to view channel
and category selections in the audio
display.
Signal is weaker in
these areas.
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
SATELLITE
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator.
GROUND
REPEATER
122
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:12:45 31S9A640 0128 Playing the XM Satellite Radio (optional)
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
There may also be other geographic
situations that could affect satellite
radio reception.
Receiving Satellite Radio Service
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM satellite radio. With the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position, push the
PWR/VOL knob to turn on the audio
system, and press the CD/XM
button. A variety of music types and
styles will play.
If you decide to purchase XM
satellite radio service, contact XM
Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, turn the TUNE
knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
Your I.D. will appear in the display.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
satellite radio mode while you wait
for activation. This should take about
30 minutes.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, ‘‘category’’
or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the display,
and you’ll be able to listen to XM
Radio broadcasts. XM Radio will
continue to send an activation signal
to your vehicle for at least 12 hours
from the activation request. If the
service has not been activated after
36 hours, contact XM Radio.
123
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Features
Driving on the south side of an
east/west mountain road.
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:12:51 31S9A640 0129 Playing a Disc
Canadian EX and EX-L models
LOAD BUTTON RANDOM
BUTTON
U.S. EX and SE models
CD EJECT
CD SLOT
CD BUTTON BUTTON
LOAD BUTTON RANDOM
BUTTON
CD SLOT
CD BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
SKIP
BUTTONS
REPEAT BUTTON
CD EJECT
BUTTON
CD SELECT BUTTONS
REPEAT BUTTON
124
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SKIP
BUTTONS
CD SELECT BUTTONS
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:13:04 31S9A640 0130 Playing a Disc
To Play a CD
To load or play CDs, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON(II) position.
You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discs
without using an adapter ring.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
To play the radio when a CD is
playing, press the AM/FM button.
Press the CD button again to switch
back to the CD player.
To play the tape when a CD is
playing, insert a tape in the player. If
a tape is in the player, press the
TAPE button. Press the CD button
again to switch back to the CD
player.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
you turn the system back on, the CD
will begin playing where it left off.
Your vehicle’s in-dash CD changer
holds up to six discs.
1. Press the LOAD button until you
hear a beep and see ‘‘LOAD’’ in
the display.
To load only one CD, press and
release the LOAD button.
2. The disc number for an empty
position is highlighted.
3. Insert the disc into the CD slot
when the green CD load indicator
comes on. Insert it only about
halfway; the drive will pull it in the
rest of the way. You will see
‘‘BUSY’’ in the display while the
CD load indicator turns red and
blinks as the CD is loaded.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.
CONTINUED
125
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Features
You operate the CD player/CD
changer with the same controls used
for the radio. To select the CD
player/CD changer, press the CD
button. The number of the track
playing is shown in the display. With
the in-dash CD changer, the disc and
track numbers are displayed. The
system will continuously play a CD
until you change modes.
Loading CDs in the In-dash CD
Changer
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:13:17 31S9A640 0131 Playing a Disc
4. When the CD load indicator turns
green and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the
screen again, insert the next CD in
the slot. Do not try to insert a CD
until ‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could
damage the audio unit.
5. Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. If you are not loading
all six positions, the system begins
playing the last CD loaded.
You can also load a CD into an empty
position while a CD is playing by
pressing the appropriate preset
button. The system stops playing the
current CD and starts the loading
sequence. It plays the CD just loaded.
For models with XM Radio
To listen to satellite radio when a CD
is playing, press the CD/XM button.
DISP − Press and release the DISP
button to switch the display between
the track and disc numbers and the
elapsed time for the current CD.
To Change or Select Tracks
SKIP − Each time you press and
+ skip button the player
release the ○
skips forward to the beginning of the
−
next track. Press and release the ○
skip button to skip backward to the
beginning of the current track. Press
it again to skip to the beginning of
the previous track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
+ or ○
− skip button.
and hold the ○
REPEAT − To continuously replay
a track, press and release the RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display. Press it again to turn it off.
126
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
RANDOM − This feature plays the
tracks in random order. To activate
random play, press and release the
RDM button. You will see RDM in
the display. Press it again to return
to normal play.
SCAN − The SCAN function
samples all the tracks on the
selected disc in the order they are
recorded on the CD. To activate it,
press and hold the SCAN button.
You will see SCAN in the display.
You will get a 10 second sampling of
each track on the selected CD. Press
the SCAN button again to get out of
the system and play the last track
sampled.
To select a different CD, use the
appropriate preset buttons (1 to 6).
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:13:28 31S9A640 0132 Playing a Disc
To Stop Playing a CD
Press the FM/AM or CD button to
switch to the radio or satellite radio
while a CD is playing. To play the
CD, press the CD button again.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
you turn the system back on, the CD
will begin playing where it left off.
To remove a different CD from the
changer, first select it with the
appropriate preset button. When that
CD begins playing, press the eject
button. Continue pressing the eject
button to remove all the discs from
the changer.
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off. The disc that
was last selected is ejected first.
Protecting Discs
For information on how to handle
and protect discs, see page 134 .
127
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Features
If a tape is in the tape player, press
the TAPE button to switch to the
tape while a CD is playing. Press the
CD button again to switch back to
the CD player/CD changer.
Removing CDs from the In-dash
CD Changer
To remove the disc currently in play,
press the eject (
) button. When
a disc is removed from a slot, the
system automatically begins the load
sequence so you can load another
CD in that position. If you do not
remove the disc from the changer
within 10 seconds, the system
returns to the previous mode (AM/
FM or satellite radio). The disc will
reload into the system and will
remain there in a pause mode.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:13:36 31S9A640 0133 Disc Changer Error Messages
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a CD, find the
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take
the vehicle to your dealer.
CD Changer
Error
Message
Cause
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
No CD in the CD
changer
128
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Solution
Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.
Check for an error message, and insert the CDs
again. If the message does not disappear or the
CDs cannot be pulled out, see your dealer.
Insert CDs.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:13:45 31S9A640 0134 Playing a Tape
Canadian EX and EX-L models
POWER/
TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
VOLUME
KNOB
TAPE SLOT
DOLBY INDICATOR
U.S. EX and SE models
TAPE EJECT
BUTTON
POWER/
TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
VOLUME
KNOB
TAPE SLOT
DOLBY INDICATOR
TAPE EJECT
BUTTON
Features
REPEAT
BUTTON
REPEAT
BUTTON
SKIP
BUTTONS
SKIP
BUTTONS
PLAY BUTTON
PROG BUTTON
REW BUTTON
FF BUTTON
TAPE BUTTON
DOLBY
BUTTON
PLAY BUTTON
PROG BUTTON
REW BUTTON
FF BUTTON
TAPE BUTTON
DOLBY
BUTTON
129
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:13:56 31S9A640 0135 Playing a Tape
To Play a Tape
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position. Make sure the open side of
the tape is facing right, then insert
the tape most of the way into the slot.
The system will pull the tape in the
rest of the way and begin to play it.
Dolby* noise reduction turns on
when you insert a tape. The
indicator will light in the
display. If the tape was not recorded
in Dolby, turn it off by pressing the
button. Dolby remains off until
you press the
button again.
*
The tape direction indicator in the
display comes on to show you which
side of the tape is playing. The ▲
indicates the side you inserted
upward is now playing. If you want to
play the other side, press the PROG
button. When the player reaches the
end of the tape, it will automatically
reverse direction and play the other
side.
Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
To Stop Playing a Tape
To remove the tape, press the eject
button. If you want to turn the player
off, press the PWR/VOL knob or
turn off the ignition. The tape will
remain in the drive. When you turn
the system back on, the tape will
begin playing where it left off.
130
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
To switch to the radio, XM Radio
(optional on U.S. EX and SE models),
or CD changer while a Tape is
playing, press the FM/AM or CD/
XM button. To change back to the
tape player, press the TAPE button.
Tape Search Functions
FF/REW − To rewind the tape,
push the REW button. You will see
REW in the display. To fast forward
the tape, push the FF button. You
will see FF displayed. Press the FF,
REW, or PLAY button to take the
system out of rewind or fast forward.
− button to find
SKIP − Press the ○
the beginning of the current song or
+ button to find
passage. Press the ○
the beginning of the next song or
passage. When the system reaches
the beginning of a song or passage, it
begins to play it.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:14:07 31S9A640 0136 Playing a Tape
REPEAT − Press the RPT button
to continuously play a song or
passage. You will see RPT displayed.
The track will repeat until you press
the RPT button again.
If you do not clean the tape player
regularly, it may eventually become
impossible to remove the
contamination with a normal
cleaning kit. Your dealer has a
cleaning kit available.
Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.
Tapes longer than that may break or
jam the drive.
If the tape is loose, tighten it by
turning the hub with a pencil or your
finger. If the label is peeling off,
remove it or it could cause the tape
to jam in the player. Never try to
insert a warped or damaged tape in
the player.
Store tapes in their cases to protect
them from dust and moisture. Never
place tapes where they will be
exposed to direct sunlight, high heat,
or high humidity. If a tape is exposed
to extreme heat or cold, let it reach a
moderate temperature before
inserting it into the player.
Never try to insert foreign objects
into the tape player.
If you see the error message
‘‘
’’ on the display, press the
tape eject button to remove the tape
from the unit. Make sure the tape is
not damaged. If the tape will not
eject or the error message stays on
after the tape ejects, take your
vehicle to your dealer.
131
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Features
NOTE: The skip and repeat
functions use silent periods on the
tape to find the end of a song or
passage. These features may not
work if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level, or a silent period in the middle
of a selection.
Caring for the Tape and Player
The tape player picks up dirt and
oxides from the tape. This
contamination builds up over time
and causes the sound quality to
degrade. To prevent this, you should
clean the player after every 30 hours
of use.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:14:18 31S9A640 0137 Radio Reception
Radio Frequencies
The radio can receive the complete
AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequencies:
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kilohertz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 megahertz
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10
kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).
Stations on the FM band are
assigned frequencies at least 0.2
megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
Radio Reception
How well the radio receives stations
is dependent on many factors, such
as the distance from the station’s
transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
station drifting in and out. If you are
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
132
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations, or hear only the station you
are close to.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:14:27 31S9A640 0138 Radio Reception
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Features
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
133
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:14:38 31S9A640 0139 Protecting Your Discs
Protecting Your CDs
Protecting CDs
General Information
When a CD is not being played, store
it in its case to protect it from dust
and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
sunlight and extreme heat.
When using CD-R/CD-RW discs,
use only high quality CDs labeled
for audio use.
When recording a CD-R/CD-RW,
the recording must be closed for it
to be used by the system.
Play only standard round CDs.
Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the
drive or cause other problems.
Handle your CDs properly to
prevent damage and skipping.
To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the CD from the center
to the outside edge.
A new CD may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the recording surface of the CD, causing
skipping or other problems. Remove
these pieces by rubbing the inner
and outer edges with the side of a
pencil or pen.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the CD player/CD changer or the
magazine.
134
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Handle a CD by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
These, along with contamination
from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
pens, can cause the CD to not play
properly or possibly jam in the drive.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:14:48 31S9A640 0140 Remote Audio Controls
CH BUTTON
MODE BUTTON
If equipped
Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.
If you are playing a CD, the system
skips to the beginning of the next
track each time you push the CH
button. You will see the disc and
track number in the display.
The MODE button changes the
mode. Pressing the button
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
CD (if a CD is loaded), or a tape. On
models with satellite radio system,
you can also select XM1 and XM2.
If you are playing a tape, press the
CH button to advance to the next
selection. The system senses a silent
period, then resumes playing.
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the button, the
system goes to the next preset
station on the band you are listening
to.
135
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Features
VOL SWITCH
The VOL switch adjusts the volume
up (▲) or down (▼). Push the
switch up or down and hold it until
the desired volume is reached, then
release it.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:14:55 31S9A640 0141 Radio Theft Protection
Your vehicle’s audio system will
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, you must
enter a specific five-digit code in the
preset buttons. Because there are
hundreds of number combinations
possible from five digits, making the
system work without knowing the
exact code is nearly impossible.
You should have received a card that
lists your audio system’s code and
serial numbers. It is best to store this
card in a safe place at home. In
addition, you should write the audio
system’s serial number in this owner’s
manual.
If you lose the card, you must obtain
the code number from a dealer. To
do this, you will need the system’s
serial number.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
radio fuse is removed, the audio
system will disable itself. If this
happens, you will see CODE in the
frequency display the next time you
turn on the system. Use the preset
buttons to enter the five-digit code.
The code is on the radio code card
included in your owner’s manual kit.
When it is entered correctly, the
radio will start playing.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have 10 tries to
enter the correct code. If you are
unsuccessful in 10 attempts, you
must then leave the system on for 1
hour before trying again.
136
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
You will have to store your favorite
stations in the preset buttons after
the system begins working. Your
original settings were lost when the
power was disconnected.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/07/13 14:24:58 31S9A640 0142 Setting the Clock
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, you will
need to set the clock.
U.S.: LX model
Canada: SE model
RESET BUTTON
CLOCK
When you are finished, press the
CLOCK button again.
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time
is before the half hour, press the
CLOCK button until you hear a
beep, then press the R (preset 6)
button to set the clock back to the
previous hour. If the displayed
time is after the half hour, the
clock sets forward to the
Features
Press the CLOCK button until you
hear a beep. The displayed time
begins to blink. Change the hours by
pressing the H (preset 4) button
until the numbers advance to the
desired time. Change the minutes by
press the M (preset 5) button until
the numbers advance to the desired
time.
U.S.: EX and SE models
Canada: EX and EX-L models
RESET BUTTON
CLOCK
CLOCK BUTTON
M BUTTON
H BUTTON
CLOCK BUTTON
M BUTTON
U.S. model is
H BUTTON
shown.
beginning of the next hour.
For example:
1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:53 will reset to 2:00
137
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:15:15 31S9A640 0143 Cruise Control
Cruise control allows you to maintain
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
Using the Cruise Control
RES/ACCEL
CRUISE CONTROL
MASTER BUTTON
1. Push in the cruise control master
button. The indicator will come on.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
138
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
CANCEL
SET/DECEL
3. Press and release the SET/
DECEL button on the steering
wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
indicator on the instrument panel
comes on to show the system is
now activated.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:15:27 31S9A640 0144 Cruise Control
When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
downshift to hold the set speed.
Changing the Set Speed
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
Push on the accelerator pedal until
you reach the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/
DECEL button.
To increase the speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, your vehicle will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
NOTE: If you need to decrease your
speed quickly, use the brakes as you
normally would.
Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will slow down about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake or clutch pedal
lightly with your foot. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator on
the instrument panel goes out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.
CONTINUED
139
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Features
Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slow down. This will cancel the
cruise control. To resume the set
speed, press the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
on the instrument panel will come
back on.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:15:38 31S9A640 0145 Cruise Control
Even with the cruise control turned
on, you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Resting your foot on the brake or
clutch pedal causes the cruise
control to cancel.
Canceling Cruise Control
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Tap the brake or clutch pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Push the cruise control master
button.
Resuming the Set Speed
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the
system remembers the previously
set cruising speed. To return to that
speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
(40 km/h) and then press and
release the RES/ACCEL button. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes
on, and the vehicle will accelerate to
the same cruising speed as before.
Pressing the cruise control master
button turns the system off and
erases the previous cruising speed.
140
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:15:42 31S9A640 0146 Before Driving
Break-in Period .............................. 142
Fuel Recommendation .................. 142
Service Station Procedures .......... 143
Refueling..................................... 143
Opening and Closing
the Hood ................................. 144
Oil Check .................................... 145
Engine Coolant Check .............. 146
Fuel Economy ................................ 147
Accessories and Modifications .... 148
Carrying Cargo .............................. 150
141
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:15:56 31S9A640 0147 Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.
Avoid hard braking for the first
200 miles (300 km).
Do not tow a trailer.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
Fuel Recommendation
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 87 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy metallic rapping
noise that can lead to engine damage.
We recommend using gasoline
containing detergent additives that
help prevent fuel system and engine
deposits.
In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
142
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
your authorized dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10 percent ethanol
by volume and up to 15 percent
MTBE by volume. Do not use
gasoline containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
For further important fuel-related
information, please refer to your
Quick Start Guide.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:16:09 31S9A640 0148 Service Station Procedures
Refueling
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
ATTACHMENT
1. Park with the driver’s side closest
to the service station pump.
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
system. The system helps keep
fuel vapors from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.
2. Open the fuel fill door by pulling
on the handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
FUEL FILL
CAP
TETHER
CONTINUED
143
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Before Driving
Pull
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
The fuel fill cap is attached to the
fuel filler with a tether. Put the
attachment on the fuel fill cap into
the slit on the fuel fill door.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:16:18 31S9A640 0149 Service Station Procedures
5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once. If you
do not properly tighten the cap,
the malfunction indicator lamp
may come on (see page 234 ).
Opening and Closing the Hood
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
LATCH
6. Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
1. Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
2. Reach in between the hood and
the front grille with your fingers.
The hood latch handle is above
the ‘‘H’’ logo. Push this handle up
until it releases the hood. Lift the
hood.
If the hood latch handle moves
stiffly, or if you can open the hood
without lifting the handle, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated.
144
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:16:30 31S9A640 0150 Service Station Procedures
Oil Check
SUPPORT ROD
DIPSTICK
UPPER MARK
CLIP
3. Pull the support rod out of its clip,
and insert the end into the
designated hole in the hood.
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then let it drop. Make sure it
is securely latched.
Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange
handle).
2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
4. Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see Adding Engine Oil on page 193 .
3. Insert it all the way back in its hole.
145
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Before Driving
LOWER MARK
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
Service Station Procedures
Engine Coolant Check
MAX
RESERVE TANK
Refer to Owner’s Maintenance
Checks on page 186 for
information about checking other
items on your vehicle.
MIN
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 196 for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
146
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
▼
05/06/30 10:16:36 31S9A640 0151 Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:16:46 31S9A640 0152 Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy
Always maintain your vehicle
according to the maintenance
schedule. See Owner’s
Maintenance Checks (see page
186 ).
For example, an underinflated tire
The build-up of snow or mud on
your vehicle’s underside adds
weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
mileage and reduces the chance of
corrosion.
Combine several short trips into
one.
The air conditioning puts an extra
load on the engine which makes it
use more fuel. Use the fresh-air
ventilation when possible.
Before Driving
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
which uses more fuel.
Try to maintain a constant speed.
Every time you slow down and
speed up, your vehicle uses extra
fuel. Use cruise control when
appropriate.
Drive moderately. Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking use more fuel.
Always drive in the highest gear
possible.
147
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:16:58 31S9A640 0153 Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make it unsafe. Before you make any
modifications or add any accessories,
be sure to read the following
information.
Accessories
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Although non-Honda accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability.
Before installing any accessory:
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags and anti-lock brakes.
148
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page 237 ) or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows. In these areas,
accessories may interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:17:07 31S9A640 0154 Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components, with
non-Honda components could
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Some examples are
Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety features can make the
systems ineffective.
Before Driving
Lowering your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.
Raising your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.
Non-Honda wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components.
149
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:17:17 31S9A640 0155 Carrying Cargo
TAILGATE POCKETS
DOOR POCKETS
DASHBOARD POCKET
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:
Tailgate pockets
Glove box
Dashboard pocket
Door pockets
Seat-back pockets
Center pocket
Cargo area, including the rear
seats when folded up or down.
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
CARGO AREA
*
SEAT-BACK
POCKETS
CENTER POCKET*
GLOVE BOX
A/T model only
150
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:17:30 31S9A640 0156 Carrying Cargo
Load Limits
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 850 lbs (385 kg) for U.S.A, 395 kg
for Canada. This figure includes the
total weight of all occupants, cargo,
and accessories, and the tongue load
if you are towing a trailer.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
850 lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the maximum load is
850 lbs and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 100 lbs.
[850 − 750 (5 × 150) = 100 lbs.]
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
in the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity in
step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle. [See page 172 .]
In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the gross vehicle weight
rating (GVWR) or the gross axle
weight rating (GAWR). Both are on
a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
CONTINUED
151
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Before Driving
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Steps for determining correct load
limit:
1. Locate the statement, ‘‘the
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed 850
lbs’’ on your vehicle’s placard.
[The placard is on the driver’s
doorjamb.]
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:17:39 31S9A640 0157 Carrying Cargo
Carrying Cargo in the Passenger
Compartment
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the driver’s ability to operate the
pedals, the proper operation of the
seats, or the advanced front
airbags.
If you fold the rear seats up or
down, tie down items that could be
thrown about the vehicle during a
crash or sudden stop. Also, keep
all cargo below the bottom of the
windows. If it is higher, it could
interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.
Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the cargo area, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible. Tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the
tailgate or the hatch glass, exhaust
gas can enter the passenger area.
To avoid the possibility of carbon
monoxide poisoning, follow the
instructions on page 50 .
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
If you carry any items on a roof
rack, be sure the total weight of
the rack and the items does not
exceed the maximum allowable
weight. Please contact your dealer
for further information.
152
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:17:45 31S9A640 0158 Carrying Cargo
If you use an accessory roof rack,
the roof rack weight limit may be
lower. Refer to the information that
came with your roof rack.
Optional Separation Net
The separation net can be used to
hold back soft, lightweight items
stored in the cargo area. Heavy
items should be properly secured on
the floor of the cargo area. The net
may not prevent heavy items from
being thrown forward in a crash or a
sudden stop.
HOOK
153
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Before Driving
The four hooks on the floor can be
used to install a net for securing
items.
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:17:52 31S9A640 0160 Driving
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
manual and automatic transmissions.
It also includes important
information on parking your vehicle,
the braking system, the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system, and
facts you need if you are planning to
tow a trailer or drive off-highway.
155
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
Driving Guidelines ......................... 156
Preparing to Drive ..................... 157
Starting the Engine........................ 158
Manual Transmission.................... 159
Automatic Transmission............... 161
Parking ............................................ 166
Braking System.............................. 167
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 168
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System............................. 170
Towing a Trailer ............................ 172
Towing Your Vehicle Behind a
Motorhome................................. 177
Off-Highway Driving
Guidelines ................................... 179
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:18:03 31S9A640 0161 Driving Guidelines
Your vehicle has higher ground
clearance that allows you to travel
over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good
visibility so you can anticipate
problems earlier.
Do not modify your vehicle in any
way that would raise the center of
gravity.
Do not carry heavy cargo on the
roof.
Because your vehicle rides higher
off the ground, it has a high center
of gravity that can cause it to roll
over if you make abrupt turns. Utility
vehicles have a significantly higher
roll over rate than other types of
vehicles.
Four-wheel Drive Models
Your vehicle is equipped with a fourwheel drive (4WD) system. When
the system senses a loss of frontwheel traction, it automatically
transfers some power to the rear
wheels. This gives you better
traction and mobility.
You still need to exercise the same
care when accelerating, steering, and
braking that you would in a twowheel drive vehicle.
See page 179 for off-highway driving
guidelines.
To prevent rollovers or loss of
control:
Take corners at slower speeds
than you would with a passenger
vehicle.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers whenever possible.
156
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:18:17 31S9A640 0162 Driving Guidelines
Preparing to Drive
You should do these checks and
adjustments before you drive your
vehicle:
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
2. Check that the hood is fully closed.
4. Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
6. Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page 88 ).
7. Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page 69 ).
8. Make sure the doors, the tailgate,
and the hatch glass are securely
closed and locked.
Driving
3. Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure (see page 213 ).
5. Check the seat adjustment (see
page 78 ).
9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page 14 ).
10. When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel (see page 55 ).
157
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:18:29 31S9A640 0163 Starting the Engine
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
3. Manual Transmission:
Push the clutch pedal down all the
way. START (III) does not
function unless the clutch pedal is
depressed.
Automatic Transmission:
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. Do not hold
the key in the START (III)
position for more than 15 seconds
at a time. If the engine does not
start right away, pause for at least
10 seconds before trying again.
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperlycoded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s f uel system is disabled. For
more inf ormation, see page 71 .
5. If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
158
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6. If the engine fails to start, press
the accelerator pedal all the way
down, and hold it there while
starting to clear flooding. If the
engine still does not start, return
to step 5.
The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:18:35 31S9A640 0164 Manual Transmission
Come to a full stop before you shift
into reverse. You can damage the
transmission by trying to shift into
reverse with the vehicle moving.
Push down the clutch pedal, and
pause for a few seconds before
shifting into reverse, or shift into one
of the forward gears for a moment.
This stops the gears so they won’t
‘‘grind.’’
Use extra care when driving on
slippery surfaces.
When slowing down, you can get
extra braking from the engine by
shifting to a lower gear. This extra
braking can help you maintain a safe
speed and prevent your brakes from
overheating while going down a
steep hill. To prevent serious engine
and transmission damage, do not
skip gears when downshifting, and
do not let the engine speed go into
the red zone of the tachometer.
Driving
The manual transmission is
synchronized in all forward gears for
smooth operation. It has a lockout so
you cannot shift directly from fifth to
reverse. When shifting up or down,
make sure you push the clutch pedal
down all the way, shift to the next
gear, and let the pedal up gradually.
Do not skip gears. When you are not
shifting, do not rest your foot on the
clutch pedal. This can cause your
clutch to wear out faster.
Rapid slowing or speeding-up
can cause loss of control on
slippery surfaces. If you crash,
you can be injured.
159
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
Manual Transmission
Recommended Shift Points
Drive in the highest gear that lets
the engine run and accelerate
smoothly. This will give you good
fuel economy and effective
emissions control. The following
shift points are recommended:
Shift up
Normal acceleration
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
15 mph (24 km/h)
25 mph (40 km/h)
40 mph (64 km/h)
48 mph (77 km/h)
Engine Speed Limiter
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
The engine speed limiter only works
when you upshift; engine speed is
not limited during downshifts. To
prevent serious engine damage
during downshifts, do not skip gears,
and do not let the engine speed enter
the red zone of the tachometer.
160
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
▼
05/06/30 10:18:43 31S9A640 0165 Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:18:53 31S9A640 0166 Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
These indicators on the instrument
panel show which position the shift
lever is in.
SHIFT LEVER
To shift from any position, press
firmly on the brake pedal and pull
the lever toward you. You cannot
shift out of Park when the ignition
switch is in the LOCK (0) or the
ACCESSORY (I) position.
CONTINUED
161
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem in the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
Shifting
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:19:03 31S9A640 0167 Automatic Transmission
Park (P) − This position mechanically locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Pull the shift lever
towards you, then move it out of
Park.
To shift from:
P to R
R to P
N to R
D to 2
2 to 1
1 to 2
2 to D
D to N
N to D
R to N
Do this:
Press the brake pedal and
pull the shift lever towards
you.
Pull the shift lever towards
you.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on
page 165 .
You must also pull the shift lever
towards you to shift into Park. To
avoid transmission damage, come to
a complete stop before shifting into
Park. The shift lever must be in Park
for you to remove the key from the
ignition switch.
Move the shift lever.
162
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Reverse (R) − Press the brake
pedal and pull the shift lever towards
you to shift from Park to reverse. To
shift from reverse to neutral, come
to a complete stop, and then shift.
Pull the shift lever towards you
before shifting into reverse from
neutral.
Your vehicle has a reverse lockout so
you cannot accidentally shift to
reverse when the vehicle speed
exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).
If you cannot shift to reverse when
the vehicle is stopped, press the
brake pedal, slowly shift to neutral,
and then shift to reverse.
If there is a problem in the reverse
lockout system, or your vehicle’s
battery is disconnected or goes dead,
you cannot shift to reverse. (Refer to
Shift Lock Release on page 165 ).
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:19:13 31S9A640 0168 Automatic Transmission
Neutral (N) − Use Neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from Neutral to
another gear.
Drive (D) − Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically selects a
suitable gear (1 through 5) for your
speed and acceleration. You may
notice the transmission shifting up at
the ON (II) position and the shift
lever is in the D position.
D3 Mode
Driving
After you stop in D, 2, 1, N, or R
position with the ignition switch in
the ACCESSORY (I) position for an
extended period, you may not be
able to move the shift lever from
neutral to reverse or Park. In this
case, press the brake pedal, and turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, then shift out of neutral.
higher engine speeds when the
engine is cold. This helps the engine
warm up faster.
D3 MODE INDICATOR
Press the D3 switch on the edge of
the shift lever to turn this mode on
or off; the D3 mode indicator comes
on whenever the D3 mode is
selected.
D3 mode can be turned on or off
only when the ignition switch is in
When the D3 mode is on, the
transmission selects only the first
three gears. Use D3 mode when
towing a trailer, or to provide engine
braking when going down a steep hill.
D3 mode can also keep the
transmission from cycling between
third and fourth gears in stop-and-go
driving.
CONTINUED
163
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:19:25 31S9A640 0169 Automatic Transmission
Shifting out from the D position will
cancel the D3 mode, and the D3
indicator will go out. Selecting the
D3 position again will resume the D3
mode and the indicator comes on.
Turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position turns this mode
off. When you restart the engine,
select the D position and press the
D3 mode switch again to use this
mode.
The D3 mode indicator also comes
on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
Second (2) − To shift to second,
pull the shift lever towards you, then
shift to the lower gear. This position
locks the transmission in second
gear. It does not downshift to first
gear when you come to a stop.
Use second gear:
For more power when climbing.
To increase engine braking when
going down steep hills.
For starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow.
To help reduce wheel spin.
When driving downhill with a
trailer.
First (1) − To shift from second to
first, pull the shift lever towards you,
then shift to the lower gear. This
position locks the transmission in
first gear. By upshifting and
downshifting through 1, 2, and D,
you can operate the transmission
much like a manual transmission
without a clutch pedal.
164
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If you shift into first position when
the vehicle speed is above 31 mph
(50 km/h), the transmission shifts
into second gear first to avoid
sudden engine braking.
Engine Speed Limiter
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:19:39 31S9A640 0170 Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Release
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal does not work. This procedure
is also used to release the reverse
lockout.
COVER
1. Set the parking brake.
3. Put a cloth on the edge of the shift
lock release slot cover. Using a
small flat-tipped screwdriver or
metal fingernail file, carefully pry
on the edge of the cover to remove
it.
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
4. Insert a flat-tipped screwdriver
into the shift lock release slot.
5. Push down on the screwdriver and
move the shift lever out of Park to
neutral.
6. Remove the screwdriver from the
shift lock release slot, then
reinstall the cover. Make sure the
notch on the cover is on the right
side. Press the brake pedal and
restart the engine.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
165
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:19:49 31S9A640 0171 Parking
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly, or
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline.
Parking Tips
Make sure the moonroof (if
equipped) and the windows are
closed.
Turn off the lights.
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, set the parking brake
before you put the transmission in
Park. This keeps the vehicle from
moving and putting pressure on the
parking mechanism in the
transmission.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.
in the cargo area or take them
with you.
Lock the doors and the tailgate.
Make sure the hatch glass is
closed securely.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
166
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb. If you have a manual
transmission, put it in first gear.
If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb. If you have a manual
transmission, put it in reverse gear.
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:19:59 31S9A640 0172 Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with disc
brakes at all four wheels. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The anti-lock
brake system (ABS) helps you retain
steering control when braking very
hard.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effectiveness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
Braking System Design
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
Brake Pad Wear Indicators
The front and rear disc brakes on all
models have audible brake wear
indicators.
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
167
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, and reduces their effectiveness.
It also keeps your brake lights on all
the time, confusing drivers behind
you.
Check your brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious and alert in your driving.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:20:07 31S9A640 0173 Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helps prevent the brakes from
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.
The ABS also balances the front-torear braking distribution according
to vehicle loading.
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumping the brakes. On dry
pavement, you will need to press on
the brake pedal very hard before the
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
ABS Indicator
If this indicator comes on, the antilock function of the braking system
has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
If the ABS indicator comes on while
driving, test the brakes as shown on
page 235 .
You should never pump the brake pedal.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
168
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:20:17 31S9A640 0174 Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the front-to-rear braking
distribution system may also be shut
down.
The VSA indicator will come on
along with the ABS indicator.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without antilock. Slow down, and allow a greater
distance between vehicles under
those conditions.
Driving
Test your brakes as instructed on
page 235 . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
Important Safety Reminders
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle. It only helps with the
steering control during braking.
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability. Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
169
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:20:26 31S9A640 0175 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
The vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system helps to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering if the vehicle turns
more or less than desired. It also
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output and
by selectively applying the brakes.
VSA Activation Indicator
When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA activation indicator blink (see
page 58 ).
When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. You will also see
the VSA activation indicator blink.
The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
170
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
The VSA system indicator (see page
58 ) comes on and stays on when
there is a problem with the VSA
system. The VSA activation indicator
will also come on.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:20:37 31S9A640 0176 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
If this indicator comes on while
driving, pull to the side of the road
when it is safe, and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine. If the VSA
system indicator stays on, or comes
back on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.
Without VSA, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.
VSA OFF SWITCH
VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.
VSA and Tire Sizes
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page 215 ).
This button is under the driver’s side
vent. Press it to turn the VSA system
on or off.
When VSA is off, the VSA activation
indicator comes on as a reminder.
Pressing the switch again turns the
system back on.
If you install winter tires, make sure
they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your vehicle was not equipped with
VSA.
171
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
If the indicator does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON (II) position, there may be a
problem with the VSA system. Have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
VSA Off Switch
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:20:47 31S9A640 0177 Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle has been designed to
primarily carry passengers and their
cargo. You can also use it to tow a
trailer if you carefully observe the
load limits, use the proper equipment,
and follow the guidelines in this
section.
Load Limits
Be sure to read the Off-Highway
Driving Guidelines section on page
179 if you plan to tow off paved
surfaces.
Exceeding any load limit or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
before starting to drive.
Total Trailer Weight: The
maximum allowable weight of the
trailer and everything in or on it
must not exceed 1,500 lbs (680 kg).
Towing a load that is too heavy can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling and performance. It can
also damage the engine and
drivetrain.
172
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Tongue Load: The weight that the
tongue of a fully-loaded trailer puts
on the hitch should be approximately
10 percent of the total trailer weight.
Too much tongue load reduces fronttire traction and steering control.
Too little tongue load can make the
trailer unstable and cause it to sway.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:21:01 31S9A640 0178 Towing a Trailer
To achieve a proper tongue load,
start by loading 60 percent of the
load toward the front of the trailer
and 40 percent toward the rear, then
re-adjust the load as needed.
Gross Axle Weight Ratings
(GAWR) − The maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo,
and the tongue load must not exceed
2,200 lbs (1,000 kg) on the front axle,
and 2,290 lbs (1,040 kg) on the rear
axle.
Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR) − The maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle and trailer is 5,950 lbs (2,700
Checking Loads
The best way to confirm that vehicle
and trailer weights are within limits
is to have them checked at a public
scale.
Using a suitable scale or a special
tongue load gauge, check the tongue
load the first time you set up a
towing combination (a fully-loaded
vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
tongue load whenever the conditions
change.
Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Towing can require a variety of
equipment, depending on the size of
your trailer, how it will be used, how
much load you are towing, and
where you tow.
Discuss your needs with your trailer
sales or rental agency, and follow the
guidelines in this section. Also make
sure that all equipment is properly
installed and maintained, and that it
meets federal, state, province, and
local regulations.
Hitches
Any hitch used on your vehicle must
be properly bolted to the underbody.
Safety Chains
Always use safety chains when you
tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
are secured to the trailer and hitch,
and that they cross under the tongue
and can catch the trailer if it
becomes unhitched. Leave enough
slack to allow the trailer to turn
corners easily, but do not let the
chains drag on the ground.
CONTINUED
173
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) − The maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo,
and the tongue load is 4,450 lbs
(2,020 kg).
kg)
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:21:13 31S9A640 0179 Towing a Trailer
Trailer Brakes
Trailer Lights
Honda requires that any trailer with
a total weight of 1,000 lbs (455 kg) or
more be equipped with its own
electric or surge-type brakes.
Trailer lights and equipment must
comply with federal, state, province,
and local regulations. Check with
your local trailer sales or rental
agencies for the requirements in
your area where you plan to tow, and
use only equipment designed for
your vehicle.
If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electrically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.
See your trailer dealer for more
information on installing electric
brakes.
GROUND
(BLACK)
RIGHT TURN
SIGNAL
(GREEN/
YELLOW)
BACK-UP
LIGHT
(GREEN/
BLACK)
BRAKE
LIGHT
(WHITE/
BLACK)
LEFT TURN
SIGNAL
(GREEN/
RED)
TAILLIGHT
(RED/
YELLOW)
174
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Your vehicle has a trailer lighting
connector located behind the left
side panel in the cargo area. Refer to
the drawing above for the wiring
color code and purpose of each pin.
If you use a non-Honda trailer
lighting harness and converter, you
can get the connector and pins that
mate with the connector in your
vehicle from your dealer.
Since lighting and wiring vary by
trailer type and brand, you should
have a qualified technician install a
suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer. Improper
equipment or installation can cause
damage to your vehicle’s electrical
system and affect your vehicle
warranty.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:21:29 31S9A640 0180 Towing a Trailer
Additional Towing Equipment
Many states and Canadian provinces
require special outside mirrors when
towing a trailer. Even if they don’t,
you should install special mirrors if
you cannot clearly see behind you, or
if the trailer creates a blind spot.
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the tires, brakes,
suspension, cooling system, and
lights are in good operating
condition.
(If you tow frequently, follow the
severe conditions maintenance
schedule.)
The trailer has been properly
serviced and is in good condition.
All weights and loads are within
limits.
The hitch, safety chains, and any
other attachments are secure.
All items in or on the trailer are
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
The lights and brakes on your
vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.
Your vehicle tires and spare are
properly inflated, and the trailer
tires and spare are inflated as
recommended by the trailer
maker.
Driving Safely With a Trailer
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
For your safety and the safety of
others, take time to practice driving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
in this section.
CONTINUED
175
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
Ask your trailer sales or rental
agency if any other items are
recommended or required for your
towing situation.
Pre-Tow Checklist
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:21:43 31S9A640 0181 Towing a Trailer
Towing Speeds and Gears
Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
If you have an automatic
transmission, use the D3 mode when
towing a trailer on level roads or in
hilly terrain (see page 163 ).
Making Turns and Braking
Make turns more slowly and wider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
can hit or run over something the
vehicle misses. Allow more time and
distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
Driving on Hills
When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (hot) mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed and shift down to 3rd
gear on the manual transmission, or
use the D3 position on the automatic
transmission. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the
brakes, and remember it will take
longer to slow down and stop when
towing a trailer.
If you must stop when facing uphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
place by pressing on the accelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause the trailer to
sway. When being passed by a large
vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
steer straight ahead. Do not try to
make quick steering or braking
corrections.
176
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Backing Up
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the bottom of the steering
wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
to get the trailer to move to the left,
and turn the wheel right to move the
trailer to the right.
Parking
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including firmly setting the
parking brake and putting the
transmission in Park (automatic) or
in 1st or reverse (manual). Also,
place wheel chocks at each of the
trailer’s tires.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:21:59 31S9A640 0182 Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Your vehicle can be towed behind a
motorhome at legal highway speeds
up to 65 mph (100 km/h). Do not
exceed 65 mph (100 km/h).
Otherwise, severe transmission
damage will occur. To avoid damage
to the 4WD system, your vehicle
must be towed with all four wheels
on the ground (flat towing).
Perform the following procedure
every day immediately before you
begin towing. Otherwise severe
automatic transmission damage will
occur.
On models with automatic transmission
On models with manual transmission
Check the transmission fluid level
(see page 200 ). Do not overfill.
Release the parking brake.
Shift to neutral.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
Make sure the radio and any items
plugged into the accessory power
sockets are turned off so you do
not run down the battery.
When you stop towing your vehicle
and shift out of the neutral position,
you may not be able to move the
shift lever from neutral to reverse or
Park. If this happens, press the
brake pedal and turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, then
shift out of neutral.
Check the transmission fluid level
(see page 199 ). Do not overfill.
Start the engine.
CONTINUED
177
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
When purchasing a tow bar, make
sure you select a reputable
manufacturer and installer. Follow
the manufacturer’s attachment
instructions carefully.
Press on the brake pedal. Move
the shift lever through all its
positions.
Shift to D, then to N. Let the
engine run for 3 minutes, then
turn it off.
Release the parking brake.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
Make sure the radio and any items
plugged into the accessory power
sockets are turned off so you do
not run down the battery.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:22:10 31S9A640 0183 Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Automatic Transmission
Extended Towing
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin
towing.
Extended Towing
If you tow more than 8 hours in one
day, you should repeat the above
procedure at least every 8 hours
(when you stop for fuel, etc.)
Failure to f ollow the recommended
instructions exactly will result in severe
automatic transmission damage. If you
cannot shif t the transmission or start
the engine, your vehicle must be
transported on a f lat-bed truck or
trailer.
When towing your vehicle for long
periods, remove the 15 A Front
Accessory Power Socket fuse to
reduce drain on battery. This fuse is
located in the interior fuse box and is
shown as number 18 below.
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
tray, coin pockets, etc) as a reminder
to re-install the fuse before driving
the vehicle.
This f use MUST be re-installed bef ore
driving the vehicle. Failure to re-install
the f use may allow you to remove the
key with the transmission in gear.
FRONT ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET FUSE
Severe automatic transmission damage
will occur if the vehicle is shif ted f rom
reverse to neutral and then towed with
the drive wheels on the ground.
Only remove the fuse after you have
performed the transmission shifting
procedure, and the key is in the
ACCESSORY (I) position. Store the
fuse in an obvious location (center
178
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If you tow a CR-V with an automatic
transmission, the transmission fluid
must be changed every two years or
30,000 miles (48,000 km), whichever
comes first.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:22:22 31S9A640 0184 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
General Information
Your vehicle has been designed
primarily for use on pavement. But
its higher ground clearance allows
you to occasionally travel on unpaved
roads, such as campgrounds, picnic
sites, and similar locations. It is not
designed for trail-blazing, mountain
climbing, or other challenging offroad activities.
Follow all instructions and
guidelines in this owner’s
manual.
Keep your speed low, and
don’t drive faster than
conditions permit.
Be sure to store cargo properly,
and do not exceed your vehicle
cargo load limits (see pages
151 and 172 ).
Wherever you drive, make sure
you and your passengers always
wear seat belts.
Keep your speed low, and never
go faster than the conditions allow.
It’s up to you to continually assess
the situation and drive within the
limits.
179
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
If you decide to drive on unpaved
roads, you will find that it requires
somewhat different driving skills.
Your vehicle will also handle
somewhat differently than it does on
pavement. So be sure to read this
owner’s manual, pay special attention
to the precautions and tips in this
section, and get acquainted with
your vehicle before you leave the
pavement.
Improperly operating this
vehicle on or off pavement can
cause an accident or rollover in
which you and your passengers
could be seriously injured or
killed.
Important Safety Precautions
To avoid loss of control or rollover,
be sure to follow all precautions and
recommendations.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:22:34 31S9A640 0185 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Check Out Your Vehicle
Before you leave the pavement, be
sure to do all scheduled maintenance
and service, and inspect your vehicle
for any problems. Pay special
attention to the condition of the tires,
and check the tire pressures.
After you return to the pavement,
carefully inspect your vehicle to
make sure there is no damage that
could make driving it unsafe.
Recheck the condition of the tires
and the tire pressures.
Remember
The route presents limits (too steep
or bumpy roads). You have limits
(driving skill and comfort). And your
vehicle has limits (traction, stability,
and power).
Accelerating and Braking
For better traction on all surfaces,
accelerate slowly and gradually build
up speed. If you try to start too fast
on wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, you
might not have enough traction to
get underway, and you may dig
yourself a hole. Starting with the
shift lever in second (2) gear will
help you have a smoother start on
snow or ice.
Keep in mind that you will usually
need more time and distance to
brake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.
Avoid hard braking. Do not ‘‘pump’’
the brakes; let the anti-lock braking
system pump them for you.
Driving off-highway can be
hazardous if you fail to recognize
limits and take the proper
precautions.
180
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Avoiding Obstacles
Debris in the road can damage your
suspension or other components.
Because your vehicle has a high
center of gravity, driving over a large
obstacle, or allowing a wheel to drop
into a deep hole can cause your
vehicle to tip or roll over.
Driving on Slopes
If you can’t clearly see all conditions
or obstacles on a slope, walk the
slope before you drive on it. If you
have any doubt whether or not you
can safely drive on the slope, don’t
do it. Find another route.
If you are driving up a hill and find
that you cannot continue, do not try to
turn around. Your vehicle could roll
over. Slowly back down the hill,
following the same route you took up
the hill.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:22:44 31S9A640 0186 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Crossing a Stream
Avoid driving through deep water. If
you encounter water in your route (a
small stream or large puddle, for
example), evaluate it carefully before
going ahead. Make sure it is shallow,
flowing slowly, and has firm ground
underneath. If you are not sure of
the depth or the ground, turn around
and find another route.
You should never use a jack to try
getting unstuck. A jack only works
on firm, level ground. Also, your
vehicle could easily slip off the jack
and hurt you or someone else.
4-Wheel Drive Vehicles
If you spin the wheels excessively
trying to get unstuck, you may
overheat the components of the
4-wheel drive system. If this happens,
the 4-wheel drive system shuts off
and only the front wheels receive
power. If this happens, stop and
allow everything to cool down. The
4-wheel drive system will work again
after its temperature drops.
If you slip the clutch for a long time
while trying to get unstuck, you may
overheat and damage it.
181
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
Driving through deep water can also
damage your vehicle. The water can
get into the transmission and
differential, diluting the lubricant
and causing an eventual failure. It
can also wash the grease out of the
wheel bearings.
If You Get Stuck
Avoid driving on soft sand, deep mud,
or other surfaces where you could
get stuck. If you do happen to get
stuck because of inclement weather
or other conditions, choose a safe
and appropriate course of action.
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:22:52 31S9A640 0188 Maintenance
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
This section also includes
maintenance schedules for normal
driving and severe driving conditions,
a maintenance record, and
instructions for simple maintenance
tasks you may want to take care of
yourself.
183
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance
If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page 259 for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.
Maintenance Safety ....................... 184
Maintenance Schedule .................. 185
Maintenance Record ..................... 189
Fluid Locations............................... 192
Adding Engine Oil ......................... 193
Changing the Oil and Filter .......... 194
Engine Coolant ............................... 196
Windshield Washers ..................... 198
Transmission Fluid ........................ 199
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ........................................ 199
Manual Transmission Fluid ..... 200
Rear Differential Fluid .................. 201
Brake and Clutch Fluid ................. 201
Power Steering Fluid ..................... 202
Lights .............................................. 203
Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 208
Floor Mats ...................................... 208
Audio Antenna ............................... 209
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 209
Wiper Blades .................................. 210
Tires ................................................ 211
Checking the Battery .................... 217
Vehicle Storage .............................. 218
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:23:05 31S9A640 0189 Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Important Safety Precautions
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust. Be sure there is
adequate ventilation whenever you
operate the engine.
Burns from hot parts. Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
before touching any parts.
184
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Injury from moving parts. Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:23:18 31S9A640 0190 Maintenance Schedule
The maintenance schedule assumes
you will use your vehicle as normal
transportation for passengers and
their possessions. You should also
follow these recommendations:
Avoid exceeding your vehicle’s
load limit. This puts excess stress
on the engine, brakes, and many
other vehicle parts. The load limit
is shown on the tire information
label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Drive your vehicle regularly over a
distance of several miles
(kilometers).
Always use unleaded gasoline with
the proper octane rating (see page
142 ).
U.S. Owners − Follow the
maintenance schedule for severe
conditions if you drive your vehicle
MAINLY under one or more of the
following conditions:
Driving less than 5 miles (8 km)
per trip, in freezing temperatures,
or driving less than 10 miles (16
km) per trip.
Trailer towing, driving with a
loaded roof rack, or driving in
mountainous conditions.
Driving on muddy, dusty, or deiced roads.
NOTE: If you only OCCASIONALLY
drive under a ‘‘severe’’ condition, you
should follow the maintenance
schedule for normal conditions.
Canadian Owners − Follow the
maintenance schedule for severe
conditions.
Driving in extremely hot [over
90°F (32°C)] conditions.
Extensive idling or long periods of
stop-and-go driving, such as a taxi
or a commercial delivery vehicle.
185
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance
Operate your vehicle on
reasonable roads within the legal
speed limit.
Which Schedule to Follow:
Service your vehicle according to the
time and mileage periods on one of
the maintenance schedules on the
following pages.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:23:30 31S9A640 0191 Maintenance Schedule
Servicing Your Vehicle
Your authorized dealer knows your
vehicle best and can provide
competent, efficient service.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
skilled person to keep your
warranties in effect. Keep all the
receipts as proof of completion, and
have the person who does the work
fill out the maintenance record.
Check your warranty booklet for
more information.
We recommend the use of Honda
parts and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done.
U.S. Vehicles: Maintenance,
replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and
systems may be done by any
automotive repair establishment
or individual using parts that are
‘‘certified’’ to EPA standards.
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all
maintenance services should be
performed at the recommended time
or mileage period to ensure longterm reliability.
186
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
You should check the following
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.
Engine oil level − Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page 145 .
Engine coolant level − Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page 146 .
Automatic transmission − Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
199 .
Brakes − Check the fluid level
monthly. See page 201 .
Tires − Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
212 .
Lights − Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
and license plate light monthly.
See page 203 .
Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).
miles x 1,000
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100 110 120 130
km x 1,000
16
32
48
64
80
96
112 128 144 160 176 192 208
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
Check inflation and condition once a month
Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km)
140
224
150
240
Every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or every 2 years, whichever comes first
Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy
Every 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or every 6 years, whichever comes first
Every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or every 5 years, whichever comes first
Every 160,000 miles (256,000 km)
At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
Every 3 years (independent of mileage)
#: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, middle column, page 186 .
*: Replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years.
187
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions
Check engine oil and coolant
Check tires
Replace engine oil
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 214 )
Replace engine oil filter
Check front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect the following items:
Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system#
Fuel lines and connections#
Inspect drive belt
Replace dust and pollen filter
Replace air cleaner element
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Replace automatic transmission fluid*
Replace manual transmission fluid
Replace rear differential fluid
Inspect idle speed
Replace engine coolant
Replace brake fluid
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:23:54 31S9A640 0192 Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions
Check engine oil and coolant
Check tires
Replace engine oil
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 214 )
Replace engine oil filter
Check front and rear brakes
Lubricate all hinges, locks and latches
Inspect the following items:
Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect the following items:
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system#
Fuel lines and connections#
Lights and controls/vehicle underbody
Inspect drive belt
Replace dust and pollen filter*1
Clean and replace air cleaner element
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Replace automatic transmission fluid*2
Replace manual transmission fluid
Replace rear differential fluid
Inspect idle speed
Replace engine coolant
Replace brake fluid
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).
miles x 1,000
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100 110 120 130 140
km x 1,000
16
32
48
64
80
96
112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
Check inflation and condition once a month
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or every 6 months, whichever comes first
Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km)
▼
05/06/30 10:24:19 31S9A640 0193 150
240
Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or every 2 years, whichever comes first
Clean every 15,000 miles (24,000 km), and replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)
(Use normal schedule except in dusty condition)
Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy
Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or every 3 years, whichever comes first
Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or every 4 years, whichever comes first
Every 160,000 miles (256,000 km)
At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
Every 3 years (independent of mileage)
#: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, middle column, page 186 .
*1: See dust and pollen filter on page 209 for replacement information under special driving conditions.
*2: Replace at 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years.
188
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:24:29 31S9A640 0194 Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page 187 ) or severe
conditions (page 188 ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.
5,000 mi
8,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp
mi/km
30,000 mi
48,000 km
mi/km
35,000 mi
56,000 km
mi/km
40,000 mi
64,000 km
45,000 mi
72,000 km
mi/km
mi/km
Date
Date
25,000 mi
40,000 km
Maintenance
mi/km
mi/km
Date
Date
20,000 mi
32,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
15,000 mi
24,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
10,000 mi
16,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp
50,000 mi
80,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
CONTINUED
189
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
55,000 mi
88,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp
mi/km
80,000 mi
128,000 km
mi/km
85,000 mi
136,000 km
mi/km
90,000 mi
144,000 km
mi/km
95,000 mi
152,000 km
mi/km
mi/km
Date
Date
75,000 mi
120,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
70,000 mi
112,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
65,000 mi
104,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
60,000 mi
96,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp
100,000 mi
160,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
190
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
▼
05/06/30 10:24:37 31S9A640 0195 Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:24:44 31S9A640 0196 Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
105,000 mi
168,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp
mi/km
130,000 mi
208,000 km
mi/km
135,000 mi
216,000 km
mi/km
140,000 mi
224,000 km
mi/km
145,000 mi
232,000 km
Maintenance
mi/km
mi/km
Date
Date
125,000 mi
200,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
120,000 mi
192,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
115,000 mi
184,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
110,000 mi
176,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp
150,000 mi
240,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
191
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:24:49 31S9A640 0197 Fluid Locations
ENGINE OIL
FILL CAP
BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)
ENGINE OIL
DIPSTICK
(Orange handle)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
POWER STEERING
FLUID
(Red cap)
CLUTCH FLUID
(Manual
Transmission only)
(Gray cap)
ENGINE
COOLANT
RESERVOIR
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
RADIATOR CAP
192
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:25:02 31S9A640 0198 Adding Engine Oil
Adding Engine Oil
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
damage the engine.
Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
5W-20 oil is formulated for yearround protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.
Ambient Temperature
193
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on top of the valve cover.
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spills immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and
tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes, and recheck the oil level on
the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill
above the upper mark; you could
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection. Make
sure the API Certification Seal says
‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:25:13 31S9A640 0199 Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Oil and Filter
Synthetic Oil
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil, it
displays the API Certification Seal
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals given in the maintenance
schedule.
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
performance and durability.
Changing the Oil and Filter
Always change the oil and filter
according to the recommendations in
the maintenance schedule. The oil
and filter collect contaminants that
can damage your engine if they are
not removed regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service stationtype hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
WASHER
OIL DRAIN BOLT
1. Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
2. Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
194
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:25:26 31S9A640 0200 Changing the Oil and Filter
OIL FILTER
6. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
33 lbf·ft (44 N·m , 4.5 kgf·m)
7. Refill the engine with the recommended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
4.4 US qt (4.2 )
4. Check the oil filter to make sure
its gasket did not stick to the
engine block. A stuck gasket could
cause an oil leak.
5. Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
8. Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
Maintenance
3. Remove the oil filter, and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
9. Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
10.Turn off the engine and let it sit
for several minutes, then check
the oil level on the dipstick. If
necessary, add more oil.
195
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:25:34 31S9A640 0201 Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant
RESERVE TANK
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Always use Honda Long-life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant
is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent water.
Never add straight antifreeze or
plain water.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Make sure it
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
196
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:25:45 31S9A640 0202 Engine Coolant
RADIATOR CAP
RESERVE TANK
5. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
2. Remove the radiator cap by
pushing it down and turning it
counterclockwise.
Maintenance
1. When the radiator and engine are
cool, relieve any pressure in the
cooling system by turning the
radiator cap counterclockwise,
without pressing down.
3. The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Pour the coolant slowly and
carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
4. Put the radiator cap back on and
tighten it.
197
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:25:55 31S9A640 0203 Windshield Washers
Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.
LOWER LEVEL MARK
Fill up to here
To check the windshield washer
fluid level, open the driver’s door,
then look at the side of the reservoir
tank located between the door and
the front dashboard.
On Canadian models: The low washer
level indicator comes on when the
level is low (see page 60 ).
If the fluid level is below the lower
level mark, fill the reservoir with
windshield washer fluid.
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
198
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Do not use engine antif reeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer f luid.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:26:08 31S9A640 0204 Transmission Fluid
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spill immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
DIPSTICK
UPPER
MARK
LOWER
MARK
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Shut off the engine.
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
4. Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
5. If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the filler hole
to bring it to the upper mark.
To thoroughly flush the
transmission, the technician
should drain and refill it with
Honda ATF-Z1, then drive the
vehicle for a short distance. Do
this three times. Then drain and
refill the transmission a final time.
CONTINUED
199
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission fluid). If
it’s not available, you may use a
DEXRON III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
replacement. However, continued
use can affect the shift quality.
Have the transmission flushed and
refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 as
soon as it is convenient.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:26:19 31S9A640 0205 Transmission Fluid
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Manual Transmission Fluid
WASHER
FILLER BOLT
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommendations in the maintenance schedule.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.
Correct level
Check the fluid level with the
transmission at normal operating
temperature and the vehicle sitting
on level ground. Remove the
transmission filler bolt and carefully
feel inside the bolt hole with your
finger. The fluid level should be up
to the edge of the bolt hole. If it is
not, add Honda Manual
Transmission Fluid (MTF) until it
starts to run out of the hole.
200
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Put a new washer on the filler bolt,
then reinstall the filler bolt and
tighten it securely.
If Honda MTF is not available, you
may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40
viscosity motor oil with the API
Certification seal that says ‘‘FOR
GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a
temporary replacement. However,
motor oil does not contain the proper
additives, and continued use can
cause stiffer shifting. Replace as
soon as it is convenient.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance
recommendations in the
maintenance schedule.
If you are not sure how to check and
add fluid, contact your dealer.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:26:30 31S9A640 0206 Rear Differential Fluid, Brake and Clutch Fluid
Rear Differential Fluid
4WD model only
The rear differential should be
drained and refilled with new fluid
according to the time and distance
recommendations in the
maintenance schedule. Have your
dealer replace the rear differential
fluid.
Use Honda Dual Pump Fluid only.
Do not use automatic transmission
fluid (ATF).
Brake and Clutch Fluid
Check the brake fluid level in the
reservoirs monthly.
Brake Fluid
MAX
Replace the brake fluid according to
the time recommendation in the
maintenance schedule.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
MIN
The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
201
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:26:43 31S9A640 0207 Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering Fluid
Clutch Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
Manual Transmission only
UPPER LEVEL
MAX
Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. You may use another power
steering fluid as an emergency
replacement, but have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.
LOWER LEVEL
MIN
The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side
of the reservoir. If it is not, add
brake fluid to bring it up to that level.
Use the same fluid specified for the
brake system.
A low fluid level can indicate a leak
in the clutch system. Have this
system inspected as soon as possible.
Check the level on the side of the
reservoir when the engine is cold.
The fluid should be between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not, add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spills immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
202
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:26:54 31S9A640 0208 Lights
Headlight Aiming
The headlights were properly aimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
cargo area or pull a trailer,
readjustment may be required.
Adjustments should be done by your
dealer or other qualified mechanic.
Replacing a Headlight Bulb
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its base, and protect the glass
from contact with your skin or hard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.
BULB
CONNECTOR
HOLD-DOWN WIRE
Low Beam Headlight
1. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pulling the
connector straight back.
2. Remove the rubber weather seal
by pulling on the tab.
3. Unclip the end of the hold-down
wire from its slot. Pivot it out of
the way, and remove the bulb.
CONTINUED
203
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
WEATHER SEAL
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
Lights
5. Install the rubber seal over the
back of the headlight assembly.
Make sure it is right side up; it is
marked ‘‘→.’’
6. Push the electrical connector onto
the new bulb. Make sure it is
connected securely. Turn on the
headlights to test the new bulb.
High Beam Headlight
4. Install the new bulb into the hole,
making sure the tabs are in their
slots. Pivot the hold-down wire
back in place, and clip the end into
the slot.
204
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
▼
05/06/30 10:27:01 31S9A640 0209 Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:27:12 31S9A640 0210 Lights
Replacing a Parking Light/Front
Side Marker Bulb and a Turn
Signal Light Bulb
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
COVER
PARKING LIGHT/FRONT SIDE
MARKER BULB
4. Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
1. Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on
the edge of the cover. Remove the
covers by carefully prying on the
edge with a small flat-tipped
screwdriver.
5. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
CONTINUED
205
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance
TURN SIGNAL BULB
Replacing Rear Bulbs
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:27:24 31S9A640 0211 Lights
BULBS
6. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
7. Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
SCREW
8. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
2. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to
remove the taillight assembly
mounting screw under each cover.
3. Pull the taillight assembly out of
the rear pillar.
4. Determine which of the four bulbs
is burned out: stop/taillight, backup light, turn signal, or side
marker.
5. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
206
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9. Align the clips on the taillight
assembly with the holes in the
body, then push the taillight
assembly into place. Tighten the
two mounting screws securely and
reinstall the covers.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:27:34 31S9A640 0212 Lights
5. Put the socket back into the light
assembly, and turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb
6. Put the cover back on the light
assembly. Push it in until it locks
in place.
1. Open the tailgate. Remove the
light assembly cover by pushing in
on the tabs on both sides and
pulling the cover off.
2. Remove the socket from the light
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
BULB
Maintenance
COVER
3. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
4. Press the brake pedal to make
sure the new bulb is working.
207
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:27:42 31S9A640 0213 Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats
Cleaning the Seat Belts
LOOP
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
you use the vehicle.
Floor Mats
The driver’s and the rear floor mats
that came with your vehicle hook
over the floor mat anchors. This
keeps the floor mat from sliding
forward and possibly interfering with
the pedals or making the front
passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective.
208
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:27:53 31S9A640 0214 Floor Mats, Audio Antenna, Dust and Pollen Filter
If you remove a floor mat, make sure
to re-anchor it when you put it back
in your vehicle.
Audio Antenna
If you use a non-Honda floor mat,
make sure it fits properly and that it
can be used with the floor mat
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mats.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
antenna on the f ront right f ender.
Bef ore using a ‘‘drive-through’’ car
wash, make sure you remove the
antenna by unscrewing it by hand. This
prevents the antenna f rom being
damaged by the car wash brushes.
Have your dealer replace this filter
every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)
under normal conditions. It should
be replaced every 15,000 miles
(24,000 km) if you drive primarily in
urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air, or if
the flow from the heating and
cooling system becomes less than
usual.
209
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance
Make sure the rear floor mats are
properly hooked to the floor mat
anchors. Your vehicle is equipped
with front passenger’s seat weight
sensors. If the rear passenger’s floor
mat is on the seat rail of the front
passenger’s seat, the sensors will
detect the decreased weight on the
seat, and they may not work properly.
Dust and Pollen Filter
This filter removes the dust and
pollen that is brought in from the
outside through the heating and
cooling system.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:28:05 31S9A640 0215 Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every six months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, areas that are
getting hard, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage
the hood and the wiper arms.
REAR
FRONT
WIPER ARMS
LOCK TAB
2. Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm by pushing in
the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in
while you push the blade assembly
toward the base of the arm.
1. Front:
Raise the wiper arm off the
windshield.
Rear:
Raise the wiper arm off the hatch
glass and hold it.
210
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If you are changing the rear
wiper blade, go to step 6.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:28:18 31S9A640 0216 Wiper Blades, Tires
BLADE
BLADE
Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.
REINFORCEMENT
4. Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
5. Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
6. Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
7. Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield or the hatch glass.
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
CONTINUED
211
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance
3. Remove the blade from its holder
by grasping the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:28:29 31S9A640 0217 Tires
Inflation Guidelines
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicle ride more harshly, are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
spare tire at the same time.
Check the air pressures when the
tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km). Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures on page 213 .
We recommend that you visually
check your tires every day. If you
think a tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
If you check air pressures when the
tires are hot [driven for several miles
(kilometers)], you will see readings 4
to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4
kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
readings. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the recommended
cold air pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
You should use your own tire
pressure gauge whenever you check
your tire pressures. This will make it
easier for you to tell if a pressure
loss is due to a tire problem and not
due to a variation between gauges.
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
212
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:28:44 31S9A640 0218 Tires
Recommended Tire Pressures
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal and high-speed driving
conditions.
Tire Inspection
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
You should look for:
Tire Size
215/65R16 98T
Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
Front/Rear:
29 psi (200 kPa ,
2.0 kgf/cm )
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.
For additional information about
your tires, see page 248 .
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a
band 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide across
the tread. This shows there is less
than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left
on the tire.
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
213
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
you find either of these conditions.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:28:57 31S9A640 0219 Tires
Tire Maintenance
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.
For vehicles equipped with aluminum
wheels:
Tire Rotation
Front
Front
(For Non-directional (For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
Tires and Wheels)
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires every 10,000 miles (16,000
km). Move the tires to the positions
shown in the chart each time they
are rotated. If you purchase
directional tires, rotate only front-toback.
Improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s wheels. Use only Honda
wheel weights f or balancing.
214
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Replacing Tires and Wheels
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
ABS and vehicle stability assist
system (VSA) to work inconsistently.
It is best to replace all four tires at
the same time. If that is not possible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:29:13 31S9A640 0220 Tires
If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure the new one matches the
specifications of the original.
Replacement wheels are available at
your dealer.
Wheels:
16 x 6 1/2JJ
Tires:
215/65R16 98T
See page 248 for information about
DOT Tire Quality Grading, and page
250 for tire size and labeling
information.
Winter Driving
Tires marked ‘‘M + S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an allweather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
Snow Tires
If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as original tires. Mount snow tires on
all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may be lower than your original tires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
CONTINUED
215
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Wheel and Tire Specifications
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
Tires
Tire Chains
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’
cable-type traction devices, with
rubber chain tensioners, on the front
tires. Use traction devices only when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Make sure they are the
correct size for your tires. Metal linktype ‘‘chains’’ should not be used.
When installing cables, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tight as you can.
Make sure they are not contacting
the brake lines or suspension. Drive
slowly with them installed. If you
hear them coming into contact with
the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Remove them as soon as
you begin driving on cleared roads.
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
216
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
▼
05/06/30 10:29:19 31S9A640 0221 Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:29:28 31S9A640 0222 Checking the Battery
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
future corrosion.
If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your dealer or a
qualified technician.
WARNING: Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative (−) cable first, and
reconnect it last.
Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
mechanic do the battery
maintenance.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected, or goes dead, the time
setting will be reset to 1:00. To set
the time again, follow the setting
procedure (see page 137 ).
217
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance
Check the condition of the battery
monthly by looking at the test
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors.
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:29:43 31S9A640 0223 Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Fill the fuel tank.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
Change the engine oil and filter.
Disconnect the battery.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Support the front and rear wiper
blade arms with a folded towel or
rag so they do not touch the
windshield.
Clean the interior. Make sure the
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in reverse
(manual) or Park (automatic).
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and tailgate seals. Also, apply a
vehicle body wax to the painted
surfaces that mate with the door
and tailgate seals.
218
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
If you store your vehicle for 1 year or
longer, have your dealer perform the
inspections called for in the 2 years/
30,000 miles (48,000 km)
maintenance schedule (Normal
Conditions) as soon as you take it
out of storage (see page 187 ). The
replacements called for in the
maintenance schedule are not
needed unless the vehicle has
actually reached that time or mileage.
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:29:48 31S9A640 0224 Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 220
If the Engine Won’t Start .............. 227
Jump Starting ................................. 229
If the Engine Overheats ............... 231
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 233
Charging System Indicator........... 233
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 234
Brake System Indicator ................ 235
Closing the Moonroof ................... 236
Fuses ............................................... 237
Fuse Locations ............................... 240
Emergency Towing ....................... 242
Taking Care of the Unexpected
219
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:29:56 31S9A640 0225 Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area that is
far away from the traffic lanes.
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park (automatic)
or reverse (manual). Apply the
parking brake.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch
the trailer.
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
SPARE TIRE
STOP
TOOL
JACK
3. To keep the tailgate door open,
use the stop from the tool kit. Put
the stop on the support strut as
shown.
220
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:30:07 31S9A640 0226 Changing a Flat Tire
5. Turn the jack’s end bracket
counterclockwise to loosen it, then
remove the jack and tools.
TOOL
Soft vinyl spare tire cover
If equipped
6. Remove the spare tire cover. Do
not forcibly pull off the cover or
you may damage it.
COVER
JACK
7. Zip the cover open.
8. Pull out the cover’s two lower flaps.
Pull the upper flaps out by
gradually working your hands up
the sides of the cover. Remove the
cover.
CONTINUED
221
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Taking Care of the Unexpected
4. The tools and jack are behind a
cover in the cargo area on the
passenger’s side. Remove the
cover by turning the handle
counterclockwise, then pulling out
the cover.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:30:19 31S9A640 0227 Changing a Flat Tire
Hard plastic spare tire cover
If equipped
NUTS
CENTER SPACER
7. Unzip the flap around the lower
edge of the cover.
8. Pull out the bottom of the cover,
then gradually pull it off.
JACKING POINT
9. Pull off the center spacer. Using
11.Place the jack under the jacking
the wheel wrench, loosen the
point nearest the tire you need to
three wheel nuts and remove them.
change. It is pointed to by an
Remove the spare tire from the
arrow molded into the underside
holder.
of the body. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
10.Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel nut wrench.
sure the center of the jacking
point tab is resting in the jack
notch.
222
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:30:28 31S9A640 0228 Changing a Flat Tire
15.Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten
them fully.
16.Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.
EXTENSION
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
13.Remove the wheel nuts, then
remove the flat tire. Handle the
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
hot from driving. Place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.
14.Before mounting the spare tire,
wipe any dirt off the mounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully; it may be hot from
driving.
CONTINUED
223
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Taking Care of the Unexpected
12.Use the extension and the wheel
nut wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
BRAKE HUB
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:30:39 31S9A640 0229 Changing a Flat Tire
20.Store the jack in its holder. Turn
the jack’s end bracket to lock it in
place. Store the tools, and install
the cover on the side of the cargo
area.
Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
CENTER SPACER
17.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
19.Put the flat tire on the spare tire
holder. Put the wheel nuts on
finger-tight, then tighten them
with the wheel nut wrench. Put
the center spacer in the center of
the wheel.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
40 lbf·ft (54 N·m , 5.5 kgf·m)
18.Remove the center cap from the
flat tire.
224
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
21.Close the tailgate.
22.Install the spare tire cover.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:30:49 31S9A640 0230 Changing a Flat Tire
Soft vinyl spare tire cover
If equipped
Make sure the cover is at room
temperature bef ore you install it. If it’s
too cold, it won’t f it easily over the tire.
OUTSIDE SEAM
24.Step back to check the alignment
of the logo. If needed, pivot the
cover until the logo is straight.
25.Starting at the top of the tire,
position the outside seam of the
cover slightly over the outside
edge of the tire. Pull the cover on,
a little at a time, and alternate side
to side along the tire until you
reach the bottom.
CONTINUED
225
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Taking Care of the Unexpected
23.Hold the cover at the 10 o’clock
and 2 o’clock positions, then place
the top of it over the spare tire.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
Changing a Flat Tire
Hard plastic spare tire cover
If equipped
SPARE TIRE BRACKET
26.Pull the bottom of the cover over
the tire.
27.If needed, readjust the cover to
smooth out any wrinkles.
28.Zip the cover closed.
29.Place the top of the cover over the
spare tire, then gradually push the
bottom of the cover over the
bottom of the tire.
30.Make sure the cover is horizontal.
If needed, pivot the cover until the
cover is horizontal.
226
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
31.Zip the cover closed.
▼
05/06/30 10:31:00 31S9A640 0231 Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:31:11 31S9A640 0232 If the Engine Won’t Start
Diagnosing why the engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position:
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
Check the transmission interlock.
If you have a manual transmission,
the clutch pedal must be pushed
all the way to the floor or the
starter will not operate. With an
automatic transmission, it must be
in Park or neutral.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 229 .
Turn the ignition switch to the
START (III) position. If the
headlights do not dim, check the
condition of the fuses. If the fuses
are OK, there is probably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem (see
Emergency Towing on page 242 ).
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of the
battery and terminal connections
(see page 217 ). You can then try
jump starting the vehicle from a
booster battery (see page 229 ).
227
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Taking Care of the Unexpected
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
When you turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, you do not
hear the normal noise of the engine
trying to start. You may hear a
clicking sound or series of clicks, or
nothing at all.
Check these things:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
If the Engine Won’t Start
The Starter Operates Normally
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position, but the engine does not run.
Are you using a properly coded
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page 71 ).
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page 237 ).
If you find nothing wrong, you will
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See Emergency
Towing on page 242 .
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to Starting the
Engine on page 158 .
228
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
▼
05/06/30 10:31:19 31S9A640 0233 Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:31:31 31S9A640 0234 Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
2. Turn off all the electrical accessories: heater, A/C, stereo system,
lights, etc. Put the transmission in
neutral (manual) or Park
(automatic), and set the parking
brake.
BOOSTER BATTERY
The numbers in the illustration show
you the order to connect the jumper
cables.
3. Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (+) terminal on your
battery. Connect the other end to
the positive (+) terminal on the
booster battery.
CONTINUED
229
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Taking Care of the Unexpected
You cannot start your vehicle with an
automatic transmission by pushing
or pulling it.
To Jump Start Your Vehicle:
1. Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:31:41 31S9A640 0235 Jump Starting
6. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
7. Start your vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
BRACKET
4. Remove the power steering
reservoir from the bracket. Pull it
away from the grounding strap.
Make sure the power steering
hose is not touching the power
steering belt or the pulley.
5. Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative (−) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
230
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8. Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.
9. Reinstall the power steering
reservoir.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until everything is
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:31:53 31S9A640 0236 If the Engine Overheats
The pointer of the vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange. If it climbs to the red
mark, you should determine the
reason (hot day, driving up a steep
hill, etc.).
If the vehicle overheats, you should
take immediate action. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
1. Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in neutral
(manual) or Park (automatic), and
set the parking brake. Turn off all
the accessories, and turn on the
hazard indicators.
4. If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
2. If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
CONTINUED
231
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to the engine.
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
3. If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running, and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
the engine should start to cool
down almost immediately. If it
does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:32:03 31S9A640 0237 If the Engine Overheats
5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see Emergency
Towing on page 242 ).
6. If you don’t find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank (see page
146 ).
7. If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the
temperature gauge or lower
before checking the radiator.
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
8. Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off.
9. Start the engine, and set the
temperature control dial to
maximum heat. Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
10.Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and watch
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair (see Emergency
Towing on page 242 ).
11.If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
232
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:32:15 31S9A640 0238 Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
1. Safely pull off the road, and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning lights.
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get
the vehicle stopped.
3. If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page 193 ).
2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page 145 ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
4. Start the engine, and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see Emergency Towing on page
242 ).
Charging System Indicator
If the charging system
indicator comes on brightly
when the engine is running, the
battery is not being charged.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
This indicator should never
come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing or stays
on, the oil pressure has dropped very
low or lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible, and you should
take immediate action.
233
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:32:26 31S9A640 0239 Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If the indicator comes on
while driving, it means one
of the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
increased emissions. Continued
operation may cause serious damage.
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator could come on
because of a loose or missing fuel fill
cap. You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
FUEL CAP’’ message on the
odometer display. Tighten the cap
until it clicks at least once.
Tightening the cap will not turn the
indicator turn off immediately; it
takes at least three days of normal
driving.
If the indicator comes on repeatedly,
even though it may turn off as you
continue driving, have the vehicle
checked by the dealer as soon as
possible.
If you keep driving with the
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
This indicator may also come on
along with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
234
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If the battery in your vehicle has
been disconnected or gone dead,
these codes are erased. It takes at
least three days of driving under
various conditions to set the codes
again.
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition to the ON (II) position,
without starting the engine. The
malfunction indicator lamp will come
on for 20 seconds. If it then goes off,
the readiness codes are set. If it
blinks five times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for a state
emissions test until the readiness
codes are set. Refer to State
Emissions Testing for more
information (see page 254 ).
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:32:36 31S9A640 0240 Brake System Indicator
U.S.
Canada
The brake system indicator normally
comes on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, and as
a reminder to check the parking
brake. It will stay on if you do not
fully release the parking brake.
If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
If the ABS indicator and the VSA
system indicator come on with the
brake system indicator, have your
vehicle inspected by your dealer
immediately.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed and repaired as
soon as possible (see Emergency
Towing on page 242 ).
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the
brake pedal to see if it feels normal.
If it does, check the brake fluid level
the next time you stop at a service
station (see page 201 ).
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
pedal.
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
235
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:32:49 31S9A640 0241 Closing the Moonroof
If equipped
If the electric motor will not close
the moonroof, do the following:
TAB
NOTCH
SOCKET
1. Check the fuse for the moonroof
motor (see page 237 ). If the fuse
is blown, replace it with one of the
same or lower rating.
2. Try closing the moonroof. If the
new fuse blows immediately or the
moonroof motor still does not
operate, you can close the
moonroof manually.
3. Get the moonroof wrench out of
the tool kit in the cargo area.
ROUND PLUG
4. To remove the round plug in the
center of the headliner, turn the
plug by using a screwdriver or
coin, then pry it out. Make sure to
align the tabs on the round plug to
the notches on the ceilling as
shown in the illustration.
MOONROOF WRENCH
5. Insert the moonroof wrench into
the socket behind this plug. Turn
the wrench until the moonroof is
fully closed.
6. Remove the wrench. Reinstall the
round plug.
If you need to close the moonroof
manually, it means the moonroof
opening/closing function is
developing a problem. Have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.
236
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:32:59 31S9A640 0242 Fuses
INTERIOR
The vehicle’s fuses are contained in
three fuse boxes.
TAB
The primary under-hood fuse box is
in the engine compartment on the
driver’s side. To open it, push the
tabs as shown.
UNDER-HOOD
(SECONDARY)
The secondary fuse box is next to
the primary fuse box.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
The interior fuse box is underneath
the steering column. To remove the
fuse box lid, pull it toward you and
take the lid out of its hinges.
UNDER-HOOD
(PRIMARY)
237
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:33:09 31S9A640 0243 Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, check for a
blown fuse first. Determine from the
chart on pages 240 and 241 , or the
diagram on the fuse box lid, which
fuse or fuses control that device.
Check those fuses first, but check all
the fuses before deciding that a
blown fuse is the cause. Replace any
blown fuses, and check if the device
works.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
headlights and all other
accessories are off.
2. Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
FUSE
BLOWN
BLOWN
3. Check each of the large fuses in
the primary under-hood fuse box
by looking through the top at the
wire inside. Removing these fuses
requires a Phillips-head
screwdriver.
4. Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse boxes and all the
fuses in the interior fuse box by
pulling out each one with the fuse
puller provided in the primary
under-hood fuse box.
5. Look for a blown wire inside the
fuse. If it is blown, replace it with
one of the spare fuses of the same
rating or lower.
238
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:33:17 31S9A640 0244 Fuses
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sure you can do without that circuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
Replacing a f use with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement f use with the proper rating
f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
If the driver’s power window fuse is
removed, the AUTO function of the
driver’s window will be disabled. To
reset the AUTO function, see page
87 .
Taking Care of the Unexpected
6. If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem in your vehicle.
Leave the blown fuse in that
circuit and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified mechanic.
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
next time you turn on the radio you
will see ‘‘COdE’’ in the frequency
display. Use the preset buttons to
enter the five-digit code (see page
136 ).
239
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
No. Amps.
No. Amps.
1
2
3
4
5
15 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
−
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Circuits Protected
Ignition Coil
Rear Accessory Power Socket
Daytime running lights*
ACG
Not Used
*
7.5 A
20 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
−
7.5 A
10 A
10 A
15 A
20 A
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
20 A
−
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
Circuits Protected
Power Window Relay
Moonroof
Accessory, Radio
Rear Wiper
Meter
Not Used
Daytime running lights*
SRS
Remote Control Mirrors
+B FR ACC
Heated Seat
Fuel Pump
Front Accessory Power Socket
Turn Signal Lights
Front Wiper
Not Used
Front Right Power Window
Front Left Power Window
Rear Left Power Window
Rear Right Power Window
: Canadian models
240
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
▼
05/06/30 10:33:24 31S9A640 0245 Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:33:35 31S9A640 0246 Fuse Locations
UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOXES
PRIMARY
Primary Fuse Box
No. Amps.
Circuits Protected
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
20 A
30 A
15 A
20 A
15 A
15 A
15 A
15 A
10 A
30 A
20 A
40 A
40 A
Condenser Fan
Engine
Interior Light
Cooling Fan
Hazard
Small Light
Horn, Stop
DBW
Back Up
ABS Motor
Rear Defroster
Heater Motor
Power Window
No. Amps.
40 A
14
20 A
15
20 A
16
20 A
17
30 A
18
100 A
19
50 A
20
21−25 7.5A−30A
Circuits Protected
Option
Left Headlight
Door Lock
Right Headlight
ABS F/S
Battery
Ignition 1
Spare Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
SECONDARY
Secondary Fuse Box
No. Amps.
Circuits Protected
1
2
3
4
20 A
7.5 A
15 A
15 A
LAF Heater
Daytime running lights*
FI ECU (ECM/PCM)
IG Coil
* : On Canadian models
241
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
Refer to Towing Your Vehicle
Behind a Motorhome on page
177 for non-emergency towing
information.
The only way you can safely tow
your vehicle is with flat-bed
equipment. The operator will load
your vehicle on the back of a truck.
Any other method of towing will
damage the drive system. When you
contact the towing agency, inform
them a flat-bed is required.
On 4WD models
Towing with only two tires on the
ground will damage parts of the 4WD
system. It should be transported on a
f lat-bed truck or trailer.
242
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
▼
05/06/30 10:33:43 31S9A640 0247 ▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:33:48 31S9A640 0248 Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle, and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
Identification Numbers ................. 244
Specifications ................................. 246
DOT Tire Quality Grading
(U.S. Vehicles) ....................... 248
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading ................................... 248
Treadwear .................................. 248
Traction....................................... 248
Temperature .............................. 249
Tire Labeling .................................. 250
Emissions Controls........................ 251
The Clean Air Act ...................... 251
Crankcase Emissions Control
System..................................... 251
Evaporative Emissions Control
System..................................... 251
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ................................. 251
Exhaust Emissions Controls .... 252
PGM-FI System ..................... 252
Ignition Timing Control
System................................. 252
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ............................ 252
Replacement Parts..................... 252
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 253
State Emissions Testing ............... 254
Technical Information
243
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers located in various places.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
Honda dealer uses to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes. It is
also necessary for licensing and
insuring your vehicle. The easiest
place to find the VIN is on a plate
fastened to the top of the dashboard.
You can see it by looking through
the windshield on the driver’s side. It
is also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
244
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
▼
05/06/30 10:33:53 31S9A640 0249 Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:33:59 31S9A640 0250 Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped into
the front of the engine block.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
Technical Information
ENGINE NUMBER
MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER
245
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:34:22 31S9A640 0251 Specifications
Dimensions
Length
Capacities
Engine
coolant
181.0 in (4,597 mm)
181.8 in (4,617 mm)*1
Width
70.2 in (1,782 mm)
Height
66.2 in (1,682 mm)
Wheelbase
103.1 in (2,620 mm)
Track
Front
60.4 in (1,533 mm)
Rear
60.6 in (1,538 mm)
*1 : U.S. SE model and Canada EX-L model
Weights
Gross vehicle weight rating
Engine
Type
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Capacities
Fuel tank
Engine oil
See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.
Water cooled 4-stroke DOHC
i-VTEC 4-cylinder gasoline engine
3.43 x 3.90 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)
144 cu-in (2,354 cm )
9.6 : 1
IZFR6K-11 (NGK)
SKJ20DR-M11 (DENSO)
Approx.
15.3 US gal (58 )
Change*1
Including filter
Without filter
Total
4.4 US qt (4.2 )
4.2 US qt (4.0 )
5.6 US qt (5.3 )
Automatic Transmission
Change*2
Total
Manual Transmission
Change*2
Total
Automatic
Change
transmission
4WD
fluid
2WD
Total
4WD
2WD
Manual
Change
transmission Total
fluid
Rear
Change
differential
Total
fluid (4WD)
Windshield
U.S. Vehicles
washer
Canada
reservoir
Vehicles
1.43 US gal (5.4 )
1.88 US gal (7.1 )
1.45 US gal (5.5 )
1.90 US gal (7.2 )
3.3 US qt (3.1 )
3.1 US qt (2.9 )
7.6 US qt (7.2
6.9 US qt (6.5
2.0 US qt (1.9
2.4 US qt (2.3
)
)
)
)
1.1 US qt (1.0 )
1.3 US qt (1.2 )
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
4.8 US qt (4.5 )
*1 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
*2 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity:
0.16 US gal (0.6 )
246
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:34:44 31S9A640 0252 Specifications
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
Lights
Headlights
High/Low
Front turn signal lights
Parking lights/side marker
lights
Rear turn signal lights
Stop/Taillights
Back-up lights
License plate light
Ceiling light
Spotlights
Cargo area Light
Rear side marker lights
High-mount brake light
Fuses
Interior
See page 240 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box door under the steering
column.
See page 241 or the fuse box
cover.
Under-hood
12 V − 55 W (H1)
12 V − 21 W
12 V − 3 CP
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
21 W (Amber)
21/5 W
21 W
5W
8W
4 CP
8W
3 CP
21 W
Alignment
Toe-in
Camber
Caster
Tires
Size
Pressure
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Front/Rear
Front
Rear
0.0 in (0 mm)
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
0°
−1°
1°45’
215/65R16 98T
29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )
29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )
Technical Information
Battery
Capacity
HFC-134a (R-134a)
17.0−18.7 oz (480−530 g)
SP-10
12 V − 36 AH/5 HR
12 V − 47 AH/20 HR
247
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:34:53 31S9A640 0253 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and the
maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and onehalf (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
248
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Traction − AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:34:59 31S9A640 0254 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
Technical Information
Temperature − A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat, and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade
C corresponds to a level of
performance that all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
249
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:35:16 31S9A640 0255 Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
98 − Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
T
Tire Size
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Below is an example of
tire size with an explanation of what
each component means.
− Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
Tire Identification Number
The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like this example:
215/65R16 98T
DOT B97R FW6X 2202
215 − Tire width in millimeters.
65 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
R
− Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
16 − Rim diameter in inches.
DOT − This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R − Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
FW6X − Tire type code.
2202 − Date of manufacture.
250
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maximum Tire Pressure
Max Press − The maximum air
pressure the tire can hold.
Maximum Tire Load
Max Load − The maximum load the
tire can carry at maximum air
pressure.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:35:26 31S9A640 0256 Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several byproducts. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Controlling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contribute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
The Clean Air Act
The United States Clean Air Act*
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
work and what to do to maintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
Scheduled maintenance is on page
187 .
*
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
251
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Technical Information
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:35:36 31S9A640 0257 Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls
The exhaust emissions controls
include three systems: PGM-FI,
ignition timing control, and three
way catalytic converter. These three
systems work together to control the
engine’s combustion and minimize
the amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
PGM-FI System
The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection. It has three
subsystems: air intake, engine
control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM) in
automatic transmission vehicles or
the engine control module (ECM) in
manual transmission vehicles use
various sensors to determine how
much air is going into the engine. It
then controls how much fuel to inject
under all operating conditions.
Ignition Timing Control System
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
(N2), and water vapor.
252
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Replacement Parts
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work together in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Honda replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
quality parts may increase the
emissions from your vehicle.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more information.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:35:44 31S9A640 0258 Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, backfiring, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s performance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.
Technical Information
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near it. Park your vehicle away from
high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.
Keep the engine tuned-up.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
253
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:35:54 31S9A640 0259 State Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
If you take your vehicle for a state
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the onboard diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely full (around
3/4).
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 8
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 20° and
95°F.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
Keep the vehicle in Park
(automatic transmission) or
neutral (manual transmission).
Increase the engine speed to 2,000
rpm, and hold it there until the
temperature gauge rises to at least
1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D (A/T) or 5th (M/T). Do not use
254
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
the cruise control. When traffic
allows, drive for 90 seconds
without moving the accelerator
pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary
slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot
do this for a continuous 90
seconds because of traffic
conditions, drive for at least 30
seconds, then repeat it two more
times (for a total of 90 seconds).
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your dealer.
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:35:58 31S9A640 0260 Warranty and Customer Relations
255
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Service
Information ................................. 256
Warranty Coverages ..................... 257
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 258
Authorized Manuals ...................... 259
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:36:08 31S9A640 0261 Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact your Honda
Customer Service Office.
U.S. Owners:
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Canadian Owners:
CUSTOMER RELATIONS
RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page 244 )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Mileage on your vehicle
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Your name, address, and telephone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Tel: (787) 620-7098
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
Tel: (800) 999-1009
256
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:36:22 31S9A640 0262 Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these
warranties:
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty − these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty − this warranty gives up
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
− all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Accessory Limited Warranty −
Honda accessories are covered
under this warranty. Time and
mileage limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty booklet for
details.
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty − covers all Honda
replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.
to 100 percent credit toward a
replacement battery.
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty − provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty − provides
coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2006 Honda Warranty Information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Canadian Owners
Please refer to the 2006 Warranty
Manual that came with your vehicle.
257
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Warranty and Customer Relations
New Vehicle Limited Warranty −
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems, and accessories against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered for the useful life of the
vehicle.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:36:28 31S9A640 0263 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
258
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1800-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington,
DC 20590.
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:36:39 31S9A640 0264 Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:
Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)
Go online at www. helminc. com
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
Publication
Form Number
61S9A04
Form Description
Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadian
owners should contact their authorized Honda dealer.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. − 6:00 P.M. EST
MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
OR
Price
Each*
$75.00
VEHICLE MODEL
2
0
0
6
PUBLICATION NUMBER
Price
Total
Each*
Price
Qty
Name
Year
H
O
N
*
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please
allow adequate time for delivery.
TOTAL MATERIAL
Mich. Purchases
Add 6% Sales Tax
HANDLING CHARGE
$6.95
GRAND TOTAL
259
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Authorized Manuals
2006 Honda CR-V
Service Manual
$50.00
2006 Honda CR-V
61S9A03EL
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
$44.00
2002-06 Honda CR-V
61S9A30
Body Repair Manual
$35.00
2006 Honda CR-V
31S9A640
Owner’s Manual
$12.00
2006 Honda CR-V
31S9AM10
Honda Service History
$12.00
2006 Honda CR-V
31S9AQ30
Quick Start Guide
FREE
Order Form for Previous YearsHON-R
Indicate Year and Model Desired
*
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.
By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
Table of Contents
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:36:52 31S9A640 0265 Authorized Manuals
Service Manual:
This manual covers maintenance and recommended
procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to understand.
NOTE: Dealers and companies, please provide dealer or company name,
and the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be
sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown
below for a quotation.
S
H
I
P
T
O
Customer Name
Attention
Street Address − No P.O. Box Number
Apartment Number
City
State & Zip Code
Daytime Telephone Number
P
A
Y
M
E
N
T
(
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
This manual complements the service manual by
providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
)
Body Repair Manual:
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
replacement of damaged body parts.
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc − U.S. funds only.
Do not send cash
Master
Card
VISA
Check here if your billing address is different
from the shipping address shown above.
Account Number
Expiration: Mo. Yr.
−
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
DATE
These publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
260
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:36:59 31S9A640 0266 Index
A
B
Battery
Charging System
Indicator............................ 56, 233
Jump Starting ............................. 229
Maintenance ............................... 217
Specifications ............................. 247
Before Driving ............................... 141
Belts, Seat ..................................... 8, 18
Beverage Holders ............................ 91
Booster Seats ................................... 47
Brakes
Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 168
Break-in, New Linings .............. 142
Bulb Replacement ..................... 205
Fluid ............................................ 201
Parking .......................................... 68
System Indicator .................. 56, 235
System Design ........................... 167
Wear Indicators ......................... 167
Braking System.............................. 167
Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 142
Brightness Control, Instruments ... 67
Brights, Headlights ................... 66, 67
Built-in Table .................................... 91
Bulb Replacement
Back-up Lights ........................... 205
Brake Lights............................... 205
Front Parking Lights ................. 205
Front Side Marker Lights......... 205
Headlights .................................. 203
High-mount Brake Light .......... 207
Rear Side Marker Lights .......... 205
Specifications ............................. 247
Turn Signal Lights ..................... 205
Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 203
C
Capacities Chart............................. 246
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 50
Cargo ............................................... 150
CONTINUED
I
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX
Accessories..................................... 148
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
Position) ........................................ 72
Accessory Power Sockets ............... 95
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 193
Adjusting the Steering Wheel ........ 69
Advanced Airbags............................ 25
Airbag (SRS) ................................ 9, 21
Air Conditioning System ................. 98
Usage .......................................... 100
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 213
Alcohol in Gasoline ........................ 142
Antifreeze ....................................... 196
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Indicator ................................ 57, 168
Operation .................................... 168
Anti-theft, Audio System............... 136
Anti-theft Steering Column Lock .. 72
Audio System ................................. 103
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 19
Automatic Speed Control.............. 138
Automatic Transmission............... 161
Capacity, Fluid ........................... 246
Checking Fluid Level ................ 199
D3 Mode ..................................... 163
Shifting ........................................ 161
Shift Lever Position
Indicators ................................ 161
Shift Lever Positions ................. 162
Shift Lock Release ..................... 165
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:37:04 31S9A640 0267 Index
Cargo, How to Carry ..................... 150
Cassette Player
Care ..................................... 115, 131
Operation ............................ 113, 129
CAUTION, Explanation of ............... ii
CD Care .......................................... 134
CD Changer ........................... 111, 125
CD Changer Error
Messages ............................ 112, 128
CD Error Messages ...................... 112
CD Player ............................... 109, 124
Center Pocket .................................. 95
Center Table..................................... 94
Certification Label ......................... 244
Chains, Tires .................................. 216
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 220
Changing Oil .................................. 194
How to ......................................... 194
When to....................................... 187
Charging System Indicator .... 56, 233
Check Fuel Cap Indicator ............... 63
Checklist, Before Driving ............. 157
Child Safety ...................................... 32
Booster Seats ............................... 47
Child Seats .............................. 32, 39
Important Safety Reminders ...... 32
Infants ........................................... 37
Large Children ............................. 46
LATCH.......................................... 41
Risks with Airbags....................... 33
Small Children.............................. 38
Tethers.......................................... 45
Warning Labels ............................ 34
Where Should a Child Sit? .......... 33
Child Seats .................................. 32, 39
LATCH.......................................... 41
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 45
Childproof Door Locks ................... 73
Cleaning Seat Belts........................ 208
Clock ............................................... 137
Clutch Fluid .................................... 202
CO in the Exhaust ......................... 251
Coin Tray .......................................... 93
Cold Weather, Starting in ............. 158
Consumer Information*................ 256
Controls, Instruments and .............. 53
Coolant
Adding ......................................... 196
Checking ..................................... 146
Proper Solution .......................... 196
Temperature Gauge .................... 62
II
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Crankcase Emissions Control
System......................................... 251
Cruise Control Indicator ................. 58
Cruise Control Operation ............. 138
Cup Holders...................................... 91
Customer Service Office .............. 256
D
DANGER, Explanation of ................. ii
Dashboard .................................... 3, 54
Daytime Running Lights................. 67
Daytime Running Lights
Indicator ........................................ 59
Dead Battery .................................. 229
Defects, Reporting Safety............. 258
Defogger, Rear Window ................. 68
Defrosting the Windows ............... 101
Detachable Anchor .......................... 85
Dimensions ..................................... 246
Dimming the Headlights .......... 66, 67
Dipstick
Automatic Transmission........... 199
Engine Oil ................................... 145
Directional Signals ........................... 66
Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 167
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:37:11 31S9A640 0268 Index
Disc Care ........................................ 134
Disc Changer ......................... 111, 125
Care ............................................ 134
Operation ............................ 111, 125
Disc Changer Error
Message .............................. 112, 128
Disc Player Error Message .......... 112
Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 195
Doors
Childproof Door Locks ............... 73
Locking and Unlocking ............... 73
Power Door Locks ....................... 73
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........... 248
Downshifting, Manual
Transmission .............................. 159
Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 5
Driving ............................................ 155
Economy ..................................... 147
Driving Guidelines ......................... 156
D3 Mode ......................................... 163
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 209
Economy, Fuel ............................... 147
Overheating................................ 231
Specifications ............................. 246
Speed Limiter ..................... 160, 164
Starting........................................ 158
Ethanol in Gasoline ....................... 142
Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 251
Exhaust Fumes ................................ 50
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
Belts by ......................................... 16
F
Fan, Interior...................................... 99
Features ............................................ 97
Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 143
Filters
Dust and Pollen .......................... 209
Oil ................................................ 194
Flashers, Hazard Warning.............. 67
Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 220
INDEX
E
Emergencies................................... 219
Battery, Jump Starting .............. 229
Brake System Indicator ............ 235
Changing a Flat Tire ................. 220
Charging System Indicator ...... 233
Checking the Fuses................... 237
Hazard Warning Flashers .......... 67
Jump Starting ............................. 229
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 233
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 234
Manually Closing Moonroof .... 236
Overheated Engine ................... 231
Towing ........................................ 242
Emergency Brake ............................ 68
Emergency Flashers ....................... 67
Emergency Towing ....................... 242
Emissions Controls........................ 251
Emissions Testing, State .............. 254
Engine
Adding Engine Coolant ............. 196
Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 62
If It Won’t Start .......................... 227
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp ................................. 56, 234
Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 56, 233
Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 193
CONTINUED
III
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:37:18 31S9A640 0269 Index
Fluids
Automatic Transmission........... 199
Brake ........................................... 201
Clutch .......................................... 202
Manual Transmission ............... 200
Power Steering........................... 202
Windshield Washer ................... 198
Folding Rear Seat ...................... 82, 83
Four-way Flashers ........................... 67
Front Airbags ............................... 9, 23
Front Seat
Adjusting ....................................... 78
Heaters.......................................... 86
Airbags ...................................... 9, 23
Fuel .................................................. 142
Check Fuel Cap Indicator ........... 63
Fill Door and Cap....................... 143
Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 59
Gauge ............................................ 62
Octane Requirement ................. 142
Oxygenated ................................ 142
Tank, Refueling ......................... 143
Fuel Economy ................................ 147
Fuses, Checking the ...................... 237
G
Gas Mileage, Improving................ 147
Gasohol ........................................... 142
Gasoline .......................................... 142
Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 59
Gauge ............................................ 62
Octane Requirement ................. 142
Tank, Refueling ......................... 143
Gas Station Procedures................. 143
Gauges
Engine Coolant Temperature .... 62
Fuel ................................................ 62
Gearshift Lever Positions
Automatic Transmission........... 161
Manual Transmission ............... 159
Glove Box ......................................... 93
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) .............................. 173, 246
H
Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 203
Hatch Glass ...................................... 74
Hazard Warning Flashers............... 67
IV
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Headlights
Aiming ......................................... 203
Daytime Running Lights............. 67
High Beam Indicator ................... 59
Reminder Tone ............................ 66
Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 203
Turning on .................................... 66
Head Restraints ............................... 80
Heated Mirrors ................................ 89
Heater, Seat ...................................... 86
Heating and Cooling ........................ 98
High Beam Lever............................. 67
Hood, Opening the ........................ 144
Horn............................................... 4, 64
Hydraulic Clutch ............................ 202
I
Identification Number, Vehicle.... 244
Ignition
Keys............................................... 70
Switch ............................................ 72
Timing Control System ............. 252
Immobilizer System......................... 71
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:37:25 31S9A640 0270 Index
Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 212
Recommended Pressures ......... 213
Inside Mirror .................................... 88
Inspection, Tire .............................. 213
Installing a Child Seat ..................... 40
Instrument Panel ............................. 55
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 67
Instruments and Controls ............... 53
Interior Lights .................................. 95
Introduction ......................................... i
J
Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 222
Jack, Tire ........................................ 220
Jump Starting ................................. 229
K
Keys ................................................... 70
L
Label, Certification ........................ 244
Lane Change, Signaling .................. 66
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................... 14, 18
LATCH Anchorage System............ 41
Lights
Bulb Replacement ..................... 203
Indicator ........................................ 55
Parking .......................................... 66
Turn Signal ................................... 66
Load Limits..................................... 151
LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ....... 72
Locks
Anti-theft Steering Column ........ 72
Childproof Door ........................... 73
Fuel Fill Door ............................. 143
Glove Box ..................................... 93
Power Door .................................. 73
Tailgate ......................................... 74
Low Coolant Level ......................... 146
Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 59
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 56, 233
Lower Anchors................................. 41
Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 246
Luggage, Storing (Cargo) ............ 150
Luggage Net (Cargo Net) ............ 153
INDEX
Indicators
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake)....... 57, 168
Brake (Parking and Brake
System) ............................. 56, 235
Charging System ................. 56, 233
Check Fuel Cap............................ 63
Cruise Control .............................. 58
DRL (Daytime Running
Lights)....................................... 59
High Beam.................................... 59
Key (Immobilizer System) ......... 57
Low Fuel ....................................... 59
Low Oil Pressure ................. 56, 233
Passenger Airbag Off .................. 30
Side Airbag Off ............................ 57
SRS ................................................ 57
Turn Signal and Hazard
Warning .................................... 59
VSA (Vehicle Stability
Assist) ............................... 58, 170
Washer Level ............................... 60
Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 55
Infant Restraint ................................ 37
Infant Seats ....................................... 37
Tether Anchorage Point ............. 45
CONTINUED
V
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:37:33 31S9A640 0271 Index
M
Maintenance ................................... 183
Owner’s Maintenance
Checks .................................... 186
Record .................................. 189-191
Required Indicator ....................... 60
Safety........................................... 184
Schedule .............................. 187-188
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .. 56, 234
Manual Transmission.................... 159
Checking Fluid Level ................ 200
Shifting ........................................ 159
Manual Transmission Fluid ......... 200
Meters, Gauges.......................... 55, 61
Methanol in Gasoline .................... 142
Mirrors, Adjusting ........................... 88
Modifying Your Vehicle................ 149
Moonroof .......................................... 88
Closing Manually ....................... 236
Operation ...................................... 88
N
Neutral Gear Position.................... 163
New Vehicle Break-in ................... 142
Normal Shift Speeds...................... 160
NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i
Numbers, Identification ................ 244
O
Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 142
Odometer .......................................... 62
Odometer, Trip ................................ 61
Off-Highway Driving ..................... 179
Oil
Change, How to ......................... 194
Change, When to ....................... 187
Checking Engine ....................... 145
Pressure Indicator ............... 56, 233
Selecting Proper Viscosity
Chart ....................................... 193
ON (Ignition Key Position) ............ 72
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ..................................... 251
Outside Mirrors ............................... 89
Outside Temperature Indicator ..... 62
Overheating, Engine ..................... 231
Owner’s Maintenance Checks ..... 186
Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 142
VI
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
P
Panel Brightness Control ............... 67
Park Gear Position......................... 162
Parking ............................................ 166
Parking Brake .................................. 68
Parking Brake and Brake
System Indicator .................. 56, 235
Parking Lights.................................. 66
Parking Over Things that Burn ... 166
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ..... 30
PGM-FI System.............................. 252
Pollen Filter .................................... 209
Power Door Locks ........................... 73
Power Socket Locations.................. 90
Power Steering Fluid ..................... 202
Power Windows ............................... 86
Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 16
Preparing to Drive ......................... 157
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11
Additional Safety Precautions .... 17
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16
Protecting Children ......................... 32
Protecting Infants ........................ 37
Protecting Larger Children ........ 46
Protecting Small Children .......... 38
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:37:40 31S9A640 0272 Index
Using Child Seats with
Tethers...................................... 45
Using LATCH .............................. 41
R
S
Safety Belts................................... 8, 18
Safety Defects, Reporting* .......... 258
Safety Features .................................. 7
Airbags ............................................ 9
Seat Belts ........................................ 8
Safety Labels, Location of .............. 51
Safety Messages ................................ ii
Seat Belts ...................................... 8, 18
Additional Information ................ 18
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 19
Cleaning ...................................... 208
Detachable Anchor...................... 85
Lap/Shoulder Belt ................. 14, 18
Maintenance ................................. 20
Reminder Indicator and
Beeper ....................................... 56
System Components.................... 18
Use During Pregnancy................ 16
Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt .... 14
Seat Heaters ..................................... 86
Seats, Adjusting the ......................... 78
Select/Reset Button ........................ 61
Serial Number ................................ 244
Service Intervals ............................ 187
Service Manual* ............................ 259
Service Station Procedures .......... 143
Setting the Clock ........................... 137
Shift Lever Position Indicators .... 161
Shift Lock Release ......................... 165
INDEX
Radiator Overheating .................... 231
Radio/Tape/CD Sound System ... 103
Radio Theft Protection.................. 136
Readiness Codes ............................ 234
Rear Differential Fluid .................. 201
Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement ... 205
Rear Seat, Folding ..................... 82, 83
Rear View Mirror ............................. 88
Rear Window Defogger .................. 68
Rear Window Wiper and Washer .. 65
Reclining the Seat Backs ................ 78
Recommended Shift Speeds ........ 160
Refueling ......................................... 143
Reminder Indicators ........................ 55
Remote Transmitter ........................ 75
Replacement Information
Dust and Pollen Filter ............... 209
Engine Oil and Filter ................. 194
Fuses ........................................... 237
Light Bulbs ................................. 203
Schedule ..................................... 187
Tires ............................................ 211
Wiper Blades .............................. 210
Replacing Seat Belts After a
Crash ............................................. 20
Reporting Safety Defects* ........... 258
Reserve Tank, Engine
Coolant ................................ 146, 196
Restraint, Child ................................ 32
Reverse Gear Position................... 162
Reverse Lockout ............................ 165
Roof Rack ....................................... 152
Rotation, Tire ................................. 214
CONTINUED
VII
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:37:45 31S9A640 0273 Index
Side Airbags ................................. 9, 26
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 26
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 29
Side Curtain Airbags ................... 9, 28
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work.......................................... 28
Side Marker Lights, Bulb
Replacement ............................... 205
Signaling Turns ................................ 66
Snow Tires ...................................... 215
Sound System ................................. 103
Spare Tire ....................................... 220
Spark Plugs ..................................... 246
Specifications ......................... 246, 247
Speed Control ................................. 138
Speed Limiter ......................... 160, 164
SRS, Additional Information........... 21
Additional Safety Precautions .... 31
Airbag Service .............................. 30
Airbag System Components ....... 21
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 29
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 29
How Your Front Airbags
Work.......................................... 23
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 26
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work.......................................... 28
SRS Indicator.............................. 29, 57
START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 72
Starting the Engine........................ 158
In Cold Weather at High
Altitude ................................... 158
With a Dead Battery ................. 229
State Emissions Testing ............... 254
Steam Coming from Engine ......... 231
Steering Wheel
Adjustment ................................... 69
Anti-theft Column Lock .............. 72
Steering Wheel Buttons........ 135, 138
Stereo Sound System .................... 103
Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 218
Sun Visor........................................... 95
Sunglasses Holder ........................... 94
Supplemental Restraint
System................................... 9, 21
Servicing ....................................... 30
SRS Indicator.......................... 29, 57
System Components.................... 21
Synthetic Oil ................................... 194
VIII
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
T
Table
Built in ........................................... 91
Center............................................ 94
Tailgate
Hatch Glass .................................. 74
Open Indicator ............................. 59
Opening the .................................. 74
Taillights, Changing Bulbs ........... 205
Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 219
Tape Player ............................ 113, 129
Technical Descriptions
DOT Tire Quality Grading* ..... 248
Emissions Control Systems ...... 251
Oxygenated Fuels...................... 142
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ................................ 253
Temperature Gauge ........................ 62
Temperature, Outside ..................... 62
Tether Anchorage Points ............... 45
Theft Protection, Radio................. 136
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 253
Tilt the Steering Wheel................... 69
Time, Setting the ........................... 137
Tire Chains ..................................... 216
▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:37:53 31S9A640 0274 Index
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level,
Automatic ............................... 199
Checking Fluid Level,
Manual .................................... 200
Fluid Selection ................... 199, 200
Identification Number............... 245
Shifting the Automatic .............. 161
Shifting the Manual ................... 159
Treadwear ...................................... 248
Trip Meter ........................................ 61
Turn Signals ..................................... 66
U
Unexpected, Taking Care
of the ........................................... 219
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..... 248
Unleaded Gasoline......................... 142
Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 195
V
Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 151
Vehicle Dimensions....................... 246
Vehicle Identification Number..... 244
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
System..................................... 170
Indicators ...................................... 58
Vehicle Storage .............................. 218
Ventilation ...................................... 100
VIN .................................................. 244
Viscosity, Oil................................... 193
W
WARNING, Explanation of .............. ii
Warning Labels, Location of .......... 51
Warranty Coverages* ................... 257
Washers, Windshield
Checking the Fluid Level ......... 198
Operation ...................................... 65
Wheels
Adjusting the Steering ................ 69
Alignment and Balance ............. 214
Wrench, Nut ............................... 223
Windows
Auto Reverse ................................ 87
Operating the Power ................... 86
Rear, Defogger ............................ 68
CONTINUED
IX
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX
Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 220
Tire Information ............................ 250
Tires ................................................ 211
Air Pressure ............................... 213
Chains ......................................... 216
Checking Wear .......................... 213
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 248
Inflation ....................................... 212
Inspection ................................... 213
Labeling ...................................... 250
Maintenance ............................... 214
Replacing .................................... 214
Rotating....................................... 214
Snow ............................................ 215
Specifications ............................. 247
Tools, Tire Changing .................... 220
Towing
A Trailer ...................................... 172
Behind a Motorhome ................ 177
Emergency Wrecker ................. 242
Equipment and Accessories ..... 173
Pre-Tow Checklist ..................... 175
Weight Limit .............................. 172
Trailer Loading ...................... 172, 173
Trailer Towing Tips....................... 175
▲
Main Menu
Index
Windshield
Cleaning ........................................ 65
Defroster .................................... 101
Washers ...................................... 198
Wipers, Windshield
Changing Blades ........................ 210
Operation ...................................... 65
Worn Tires ..................................... 213
Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 242
*
: U.S. only
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
▼
05/06/30 10:37:56 31S9A640 0275 ▲
Main Menu
▼
05/06/30 10:38:17 31S9A640 0277 Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 87 or higher.
Fuel Tank Capacity:
15.3 US gal (58 )
Recommended Engine Oil:
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page 193 ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.4 US qt (4.2 )
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or
a DEXRON III ATF as a
temporary replacement (see page
199 ).
Manual Transmission Fluid:
Honda Manual Transmission
Fluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30
or 10W-40 motor oil as a
temporary replacement (see page
200 ).
Capacity (including differential):
2.0 US qt (1.9 )
Rear Differential Fluid:
Honda Dual Pump Fluid. Do not
use ATF.
Capacity:
1.1 US qt (1.0 )
Power Steering Fluid:
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page 202 ).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Brake Fluid:
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page 201 ).
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Front/Rear:
29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement